GLA
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple
®
App store or
Google Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
Order no. P156 0169 13 Part no. 156 584 90 01 Edition B2019
É1565849001EËÍ
1565849001
GLA Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succes-
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can
find more information about a topic.
Dis‐Dis‐
playplay
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
Example
G
WARNING
If the front passenger air bag has been acti-
vated, a child on the front passenger seat
may be hit by the front passenger air bag in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or fatal injury.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the CHILD can occur.
Read the chapter "Children in the vehicle" .
As at 19.03.2018
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them could result in damage to the
vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have
the option to obtain a comprehensive
printed version of the Supplement for
your multimedia system from your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet
provides easy access to all information
regarding your vehicle and multimedia
system. It also provides helpful anima-
tions, interesting background information
and a wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App,
you can view all the information on your
vehicle and multimedia system via mobile
Internet or download it independently of
network access. Available for smart-
phones or tablets.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1565849001
É1565849001EËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24
Introduction ...........................................24
Operation ............................................... 24
Introduction ......................................... 25
Protecting the environment ...................25
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...............25
Operator's Manual ................................. 26
Service and vehicle operation ................26
Operating safety .................................... 27
QR code for rescue card ........................ 28
Data storage .......................................... 28
Information on copyright ....................... 30
At a glance ........................................... 31
Cockpit .................................................. 31
Instrument cluster ................................. 32
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 33
Center console ...................................... 34
Door control panel ................................. 37
Overhead control panel .........................38
Safety ................................................... 39
Panic alarm ............................................ 39
Occupant safety .................................... 39
Children in the vehicle ........................... 53
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 59
Driving safety systems ........................... 60
Protection against theft .........................67
Opening and closing ........................... 69
SmartKey ............................................... 69
Doors ..................................................... 75
Cargo compartment ...............................77
Side windows ......................................... 83
Panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel ................................................ 87
Seats, steering wheel and mir-
rors ....................................................... 92
Correct driver's seat position ................ 92
Seats ..................................................... 92
Steering wheel ....................................... 97
Mirrors ................................................... 98
Memory function ................................. 101
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 102
Exterior lighting ................................... 102
Interior lighting .................................... 105
Replacing bulbs ................................... 106
Windshield wipers ................................ 109
Climate control ................................. 113
Overview of climate control systems ... 113
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 118
Air vents .............................................. 123
Driving and parking .......................... 124
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 124
Driving ................................................. 124
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) ..................................................... 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... 133
Automatic transmission ....................... 134
Refueling ............................................. 142
Parking ................................................ 145
Driving tips .......................................... 148
Driving systems ................................... 157
On-board computer and displays .... 188
Important safety notes ........................ 188
Displays and operation ........................ 188
Menus and submenus ......................... 191
Display messages ................................ 203
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................... 230
Multimedia system ........................... 242
General notes ...................................... 242
Important safety notes ........................ 242
Function restrictions ............................ 242
Operating system ................................ 243
2
Contents
Stowage and features ...................... 250
Loading guidelines ...............................250
Stowage areas ..................................... 250
Features .............................................. 257
Maintenance and care ...................... 273
Engine compartment ........................... 273
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 277
Care ..................................................... 278
Roadside Assistance ........................ 286
Where will I find...? .............................. 286
Flat tire ................................................ 287
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 292
Jump-starting ....................................... 295
Towing and tow-starting ......................298
Fuses ................................................... 301
Wheels and tires ............................... 304
Important safety notes ........................ 304
Operation ............................................ 304
Winter operation .................................. 306
Tire pressure ....................................... 307
Loading the vehicle .............................. 316
All about wheels and tires ................... 319
Changing a wheel ................................ 325
Wheel and tire combinations ...............329
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 330
Technical data ................................... 332
Information regarding technical data
............................................................. 332
Vehicle electronics .............................. 332
Identification plates .............................333
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 334
Vehicle data ......................................... 339
Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 340
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
4MATIC
Display message ............................ 227
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 168
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Function/notes .............................182
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 204
Function/notes ................................ 60
Important safety notes .................... 60
Warning lamp ................................. 233
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident
Automatic measures after an
accident ...........................................53
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 248
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification .................118
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 197
Display message ............................ 210
Function/notes ................................ 61
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 160
Calling up a speed ......................... 161
Cruise control lever ....................... 160
Deactivating ................................... 163
Display message ............................ 221
Displays in the multifunction dis-
play ................................................ 164
Displays on the instrument clus-
ter .................................................. 164
Driving tips .................................... 164
Function/notes ............................. 158
Important safety notes .................. 159
Setting a speed .............................. 162
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 162
Stopping ........................................ 162
Storing a speed .............................. 161
Active Parking Assist
Canceling ....................................... 178
Detecting parking spaces .............. 175
Display message ............................ 220
Exiting a parking space .................. 177
General notes ................................ 174
Important safety notes .................. 174
Parking .......................................... 176
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67
Additional speedometer ................... 199
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 337
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Adjusting the volume
Multimedia system ........................ 243
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 51
Display message ............................ 213
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 45
Important safety notes .................... 44
Introduction ..................................... 44
Knee bag .......................................... 46
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 47
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 40
Side impact air bag .......................... 46
Window curtain air bag .................... 47
Air vents
Important safety notes .................. 123
Rear ............................................... 123
Setting the center air vents ........... 123
Setting the side air vents ............... 123
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 68
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 68
4
Index
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem ................................................ 168
Performance Seat ............................ 96
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
General Information .......................168
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 200
AMG Performance exhaust sys-
tem ..................................................... 130
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Approach/departure angle .............. 156
Ashtray ............................................... 259
Assistance display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 197
Assistance menu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................196
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........278
Driving abroad ............................... 278
Hiding a service message .............. 277
Information about Service ............. 278
Resetting the service interval dis-
play ................................................ 278
Service message ............................ 277
Special service requirements ......... 278
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 68
Function ...........................................68
Switching off the alarm .................... 68
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 198
Display message ............................ 219
Function/notes ............................. 183
Audio 20
Driving dynamics display ............... 171
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 194
Audio system
see Digital Operator's Manual
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 216
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 279
Automatic engine start (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 129
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 129
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 102
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 137
Changing gear ............................... 137
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 134
Drive program ................................ 138
Drive program display .................... 134
Driving tips .................................... 137
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 133
Emergency running mode .............. 142
Engaging drive position .................. 136
Engaging neutral ............................ 135
Engaging park position
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 136
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 135
Engaging reverse gear ................... 135
Engaging the park position ............ 134
Holding the vehicle stationary on
uphill gradients .............................. 138
Kickdown ....................................... 138
Manual shifting .............................. 140
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 200
Overview ........................................ 134
Problem (malfunction) ................... 142
Pulling away ................................... 128
Selector lever ................................ 136
Starting the engine ........................ 127
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 140
Transmission position display ........ 136
Index
5
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................134
Transmission positions .................. 137
Automatic transmission emer-
gency mode ....................................... 142
B
Back button ....................................... 243
Backup lamp
Display message ............................ 215
Bag hook ............................................ 255
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61
Basic settings
see Settings
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 72
Important safety notes .................... 72
Replacing ......................................... 72
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 294
Display message ............................ 218
Important safety notes .................. 292
Jump starting ................................. 295
Replacing ....................................... 295
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt warning ......................................... 44
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 198
Display message ............................ 220
Notes/function .............................. 185
Blower
see Climate control
Bluetooth
®
Searching for a mobile phone ........246
Searching for a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 247
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Telephony ...................................... 246
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 209
Notes ............................................. 337
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamp
Replacing bulbs .............................108
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 215
Brakes
ABS ..................................................60
BAS .................................................. 61
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 337
Display message ............................ 204
EBD .................................................. 67
Hill start assist ............................... 128
HOLD function ............................... 165
Important safety notes .................. 150
Maintenance .................................. 151
Parking brake ................................ 146
Riding tips ...................................... 150
Situation-dependent braking
assistance ........................................ 63
Warning lamp ................................. 232
Breakdown assistance
Where will I find...? ........................ 286
see Flat tire
see Tow-starting
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 32
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 189
C
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Car wash ........................................ 279
Carpets .......................................... 285
Display ........................................... 283
Exhaust pipe .................................. 283
Exterior lights ................................ 282
Gear or selector lever .................... 284
Interior ........................................... 283
Matte finish ................................... 280
Notes ............................................. 278
6
Index
Paint ..............................................280
Plastic trim ....................................284
Power washer ................................ 279
Rear view camera .......................... 283
Roof lining ...................................... 285
Seat belt ........................................ 285
Seat cover ..................................... 284
Sensors ......................................... 282
Steering wheel ............................... 284
Trim pieces ....................................284
Washing by hand ........................... 279
Wheels ...........................................281
Windows ........................................ 281
Wiper blades .................................. 282
Wooden trim .................................. 284
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 253
Cargo compartment floor
Important safety notes .................. 256
Opening/closing ............................ 256
Stowage well (under) ..................... 256
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 255
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
CD player (on-board computer) ........195
Center console
Lower section .................................. 35
Upper section .................................. 34
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 199
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........69
Change of address .............................. 26
Change of ownership .......................... 26
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires ............................ 326
Child
Restraint system .............................. 55
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 58
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 56
On the front-passenger seat ............ 57
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 58
Top Tether .......................................56
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 58
Rear doors .......................................59
Children
Special seat belt retractor ...............54
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes .................... 53
Cigarette lighter ................................ 259
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ...........................282
Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 114
Automatic climate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 116
Controlling automatically ...............119
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 118
Defrosting the windows ................. 121
Defrosting the windshield .............. 120
General notes ................................ 113
Indicator lamp ................................ 119
Information about using auto-
matic climate control ..................... 117
Maximum cooling .......................... 121
Notes on using the air-condition-
ing system ..................................... 115
Overview of systems ......................113
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 122
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 119
Refrigerant ..................................... 338
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 339
Setting the air distribution ............. 120
Setting the air vents ......................123
Setting the airflow ......................... 120
Setting the temperature ................ 119
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 122
Switching on/off ........................... 118
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 122
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 122
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 120
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 31
see Instrument cluster
Collision warning
see Active Brake Assist
Index
7
COMAND
Driving dynamics display ...............171
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 283
Combination switch .......................... 104
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 271
Calling up ....................................... 271
Magnetic field zone maps .............. 272
Setting ...........................................271
Connecting a USB device
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 192
Controller ...........................................243
Convenience closing feature .............. 85
Convenience opening feature ............ 84
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 276
Display message ............................ 217
Filling capacity ............................... 338
Important safety notes .................. 337
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 200
Temperature gauge ........................ 189
Warning lamp ................................. 238
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 30
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 214
Function/notes .............................104
Cover
see Roller sunblind
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 157
Cruise control lever ....................... 157
Deactivating ................................... 158
Display message ............................ 222
Driving system ............................... 157
Function/notes .............................157
Important safety notes .................. 157
Setting a speed .............................. 158
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 157
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 257
Important safety notes .................. 257
Rear compartment ......................... 258
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 28
Customer Relations Department ....... 28
D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 216
Function/notes .............................102
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 199
Declarations of conformity ................. 27
Decorative film
Cleaning instructions ..................... 281
Diagnostics connection ......................27
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................24
Introduction .....................................24
Digital speedometer .........................193
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 134
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 277
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 203
Driving systems .............................219
Engine ............................................ 217
General notes ................................ 203
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 203
Lights ............................................. 214
Safety systems .............................. 204
SmartKey ....................................... 229
Tires ............................................... 223
Vehicle ...........................................225
Distance control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Distance recorder .............................192
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 240
8
Index
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 62
Warning lamp .................................240
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 199
Automatic locking (switch) ...............76
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) .......................................69
Control panel ...................................37
Display message ............................ 228
Emergency locking ........................... 77
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Important safety notes .................... 75
Opening (from inside) ...................... 75
Drinking and driving ......................... 149
Drive program
Automatic transmission ................. 138
Display ........................................... 136
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134
Driver's door
see Doors
Driver's seat
see Seat
Driving
Towing vehicles ............................. 132
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 278
Driving dynamics display
Off-road program ........................... 171
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle ............ 156
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving on flooded roads .................. 153
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 61
Situation-dependent braking
assistance ........................................ 63
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 60
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 61
Distance warning function ............... 62
EBD (electronic brake force dis-
tribution) .......................................... 67
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 63
Important safety information ........... 60
Overview .......................................... 60
STEER CONTROL ............................. 67
Driving system
Off-road program ........................... 170
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 171
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 167
Start-off assist ............................... 166
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 182
Active Parking Assist ..................... 174
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 168
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 183
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 185
Cruise control ................................ 157
Display message ............................ 219
HOLD function ............................... 165
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 186
Lane Tracking package .................. 185
Rear view camera .......................... 178
Driving tips
Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC ............................ 158, 164
Automatic transmission ................. 137
Brakes ........................................... 150
Break-in period .............................. 124
Checking brake lining thickness .... 152
Downhill gradient ........................... 150
Drinking and driving ....................... 149
Driving in winter ............................. 153
Driving on flooded roads ................ 153
Driving on sand .............................. 155
Driving on wet roads ...................... 152
Exhaust check ............................... 149
Fuel ................................................ 149
General .......................................... 148
Hydroplaning ................................. 152
Icy road surfaces ........................... 153
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 151
Off-road driving .............................. 153
Snow chains .................................. 307
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 124
Tire ruts ......................................... 156
Traveling uphill ............................... 156
Wet road surface ........................... 151
Index
9
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Display message ............................ 219
Function/notes .............................169
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 195
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
DYNAMIC SELECT button
Climate control (3-zone auto-
matic climate control) .................... 118
Climate control (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 115
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all
vehicles except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ............................................. 132
DYNAMIC SELECT controller ............ 133
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 133
E
EASY-PACK tailgate
see Tailgate
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................ 206
Function/notes ................................ 67
ECO display
Function/notes .............................149
On-board computer ....................... 192
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 129
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 129
Deactivating/activating ................. 130
General information ....................... 129
Important safety notes .................. 129
Introduction ................................... 129
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an
accident ...........................................53
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 76
Vehicle .............................................76
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 331
Important safety notes .................. 330
Removing .......................................331
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 51
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 238
Display message ............................ 217
ECO start/stop function ................ 129
Engine number ............................... 334
Irregular running ............................ 131
Jump-starting ................................. 295
Starting (important safety notes) ... 126
Starting problems .......................... 131
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 127
Starting with the Start/Stop but-
ton ................................................. 127
Switching off .................................. 146
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 301
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 131
Engine oil
Adding ...........................................275
Additives ........................................ 337
Checking the oil level ..................... 274
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 274
Display message ............................ 218
Filling capacity ............................... 337
Notes about oil grades ................... 336
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 274
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 200
Engine oil additives
see Additives (engine oil)
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 201
Characteristics ................................. 64
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 65
10
Index
Deactivating/activating (except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 64
Deactivating/activating (on-
board computer, except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 197
Display message ............................ 204
Function/notes ................................ 63
General notes .................................. 63
Important safety information ........... 64
Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 235
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 64
Exhaust
see Exhaust pipe
Exhaust check ................................... 149
Exhaust pipe
Cleaning ......................................... 283
Exterior lighting
Cleaning ......................................... 282
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 98
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 99
Folding in when locking (on-
board computer) ............................ 200
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 99
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 99
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 99
Setting ............................................. 99
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 101
Storing the parking position .......... 100
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 251
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 244
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 288
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 287
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 289
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ........................................... 272
Fog lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 332
Two-way radio ................................ 332
Front fog lamps
Display message ............................ 215
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Front-passenger seat
Folding the backrest forward/
back ............................................... 252
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 336
Consumption statistics .................. 192
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 192
Displaying the range ...................... 192
Driving tips .................................... 149
E10 ................................................ 335
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 335
Important safety notes .................. 335
Problem (malfunction) ................... 145
Refueling ........................................ 142
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 335
Fuel filler flap
Opening ......................................... 144
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 192
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 335
Problem (malfunction) ................... 145
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 302
Before changing ............................. 301
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 302
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 302
Important safety notes .................. 301
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 271
General notes ................................ 268
Important safety notes .................. 268
Index
11
Opening/closing the garage door .. 270
Problems when programming ........ 270
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 268
Synchronizing the rolling code .......269
Gasoline ............................................. 335
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 200
Genuine parts ...................................... 25
Glove box ...........................................251
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
H
Handling control system
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 80
Hazard warning lamps
Display message ............................ 228
Switching on/off ........................... 104
Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 95
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 95
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 96
Headlamps
Fogging up ..................................... 105
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher .............................104
High-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 215
Replacing bulbs .............................107
Switching on/off ........................... 104
Hill start assist .................................. 128
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 166
Activation conditions ..................... 165
Deactivating ................................... 166
Display message ............................ 219
Function/notes .............................165
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Hood
Closing ...........................................274
Display message ............................ 228
Important safety notes .................. 273
Opening ......................................... 273
Horn ...................................................... 31
Hydroplaning ..................................... 152
I
Ignition key
see SmartKey
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 67
Indicator lamp
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 108
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 32
Settings ......................................... 198
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 188
Interior lighting
Control ...........................................105
Overview ........................................ 105
Reading lamp ................................. 105
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 287
Using ............................................. 327
Jump starting (engine) ......................295
K
Key positions
Start/Stop button .......................... 125
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 85
Deactivation ..................................... 70
Locking ............................................ 70
Unlocking ......................................... 70
12
Index
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 138
Manual gearshifting .......................142
Knee bag .............................................. 46
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 198
Display message ............................ 220
Function/information .................... 186
Lane Tracking package ..................... 185
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 201
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 56
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 215
Light sensor (display message) ....... 216
Lights
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 102
Cornering light function ................. 104
Fog lamps ...................................... 103
Fogged up headlamps .................... 105
Hazard warning lamps ................... 104
High beam flasher .......................... 104
High-beam headlamps ................... 104
Light switch ................................... 102
Low-beam headlamps .................... 103
Parking lamps ................................ 103
Rear fog lamp ................................ 103
Setting exterior lighting ................. 102
Standing lamps .............................. 103
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 199
Turn signals ................................... 104
Loading guidelines ............................ 250
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 76
Emergency locking ........................... 77
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 75
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 200
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 214
Replacing bulbs ............................. 107
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Lubricant additives
see Additives (engine oil)
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port .................................................. 96
M
M+S tires ............................................ 306
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 280
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 71
Inserting .......................................... 72
Locking vehicle ................................ 77
Removing ......................................... 71
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 76
Memory card (audio) ......................... 195
Memory function ............................... 101
Mercedes me connect
Call priority .................................... 264
Display message ............................ 209
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 264
Downloading routes ....................... 267
General notes ................................ 260
Geo fencing ................................... 267
Info call button .............................. 263
Mercedes-Benz emergency call ..... 261
Recovering a stolen vehicle ........... 266
Remote Vehicle Health Check ....... 266
Roadside Assistance call button .... 263
Search & Send ............................... 265
Self-diagnosis ................................ 261
Speed alert .................................... 267
System .......................................... 261
Index
13
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268
Vehicle remote locking .................. 266
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 203
Messages
see Display messages
Mirror turn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 282
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) ..............................................246
Connecting (device manager) ........247
Frequencies ................................... 332
Installation ..................................... 332
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195
Transmission output (maximum) .... 332
Model type
see Vehicle identification plate
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................71
MOExtended tires .............................. 288
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 329
Mounting a new wheel ................... 328
Preparing the vehicle .....................326
Raising the vehicle ......................... 327
Removing a wheel .......................... 328
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 326
MP3
Operation ....................................... 195
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Multifunction display
Function/notes .............................191
Permanent display ......................... 199
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board com-
puter .............................................. 189
Overview .......................................... 33
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ......................243
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
N
Navigation
Entering a destination .................... 244
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 124
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 47
Faults ............................................... 51
Operation ......................................... 47
Self-test ...........................................50
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................44
Automatic measures after an
accident ........................................... 53
Belt warning ..................................... 44
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Important safety notes .................... 39
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 39
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 47
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 40
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 59
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40
Seat belt .......................................... 41
OCS
Faults ............................................... 51
Operation ......................................... 47
Self-test ........................................... 50
Odometer ........................................... 192
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle ............ 340
Checklist after driving off-road ...... 155
Checklist before driving off-road .... 155
General information ....................... 154
Important safety notes .................. 153
14
Index
Maximum gradient climbing abil-
ity .................................................. 340
Traveling uphill ...............................156
Off-road Program
Driving dynamics display ............... 171
General notes ................................ 170
Off-road system
DSR ............................................... 169
Off road drive program .................. 170
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 64
Off-road ABS .................................... 60
Off-road ESP
®
.................................. 66
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 200
Assistance graphic menu ............... 197
Assistance menu ........................... 196
Audio menu ................................... 194
Convenience submenu .................. 200
Display messages .......................... 203
Displaying a service message ........ 278
Factory settings ............................. 200
Important safety notes .................. 188
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 198
Lighting submenu .......................... 199
Menu overview .............................. 191
Message memory .......................... 203
Navigation menu ............................ 193
Operation ....................................... 189
RACETIMER ................................... 201
Service menu ................................. 198
Settings menu ............................... 198
Standard display ............................ 192
Telephone menu ............................ 195
Trip menu ...................................... 192
Vehicle submenu ........................... 199
Video DVD operation ..................... 195
On-board diagnostic interface
see Diagnostics connection
Opening and closing the side trim
panels ................................................. 108
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 24
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 26
Outside temperature display ........... 188
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 59
P
Paint code number ............................ 333
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 280
Panic alarm .......................................... 39
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
Important safety notes .................... 87
Operating ......................................... 88
Operating the roller sunblinds for
the sliding sunroof ........................... 89
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 91
Reversing feature ............................. 88
Parcel shelf ........................................ 255
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 145
Parking brake ................................ 146
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger
side ................................................ 100
Rear view camera .......................... 178
Parking aid
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear view camera
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 173
Driving system ............................... 171
Function/notes ............................. 171
Important safety notes .................. 171
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 174
Sensor range ................................. 172
Warning display ............................. 173
Parking assistance
see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Applying automatically ................... 147
Applying or releasing manually ...... 147
Display message ............................ 206
Electric parking brake .................... 146
Emergency braking ........................ 148
General notes ................................ 146
Releasing automatically ................. 148
Warning lamp ................................. 237
Index
15
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 103
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................213
Indicator lamps ................................ 40
Problem (malfunction) ................... 213
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 59
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) ..................................................284
Power washers .................................. 279
Power windows
see Side windows
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 68
Immobilizer ...................................... 67
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 25
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 128
General notes ................................ 128
Hill start assist ............................... 128
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 28
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27
R
RACE START
Important safety notes .................. 167
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ............................................. 167
RACE TIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 201
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 194
see Digital Operator's Manual
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Rain closing feature (panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding
panel) .................................................... 89
REACH Regulation ............................... 28
Reading lamp ..................................... 105
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ......................123
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 215
Replacing bulbs .............................108
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear seat
Adjusting the angle of the backr-
ests ................................................ 254
Rear seats
Folding the backrest forwards/
back ............................................... 254
Rear view camera
"Reverse parking" function ............ 180
Cleaning instructions ..................... 283
Display in the multimedia system .. 179
Function/notes .............................178
General notes ................................ 178
Switching on/off ........................... 179
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 122
Switching on/off ........................... 122
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 112
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 98
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 99
Reflective safety jacket .................... 286
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 338
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Important safety notes .................. 142
Refueling process .......................... 143
see Fuel
16
Index
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 268
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 268
Replacing bulbs
Brake lamp .................................... 108
High-beam headlamps ................... 107
Important safety notes .................. 106
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 107
Low-beam headlamps .................... 107
Overview of bulb types .................. 106
Rear fog lamp ................................ 108
Turn signals (front) ......................... 108
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 108
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 218
Warning lamp ................................. 238
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 122
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 211
Introduction ..................................... 39
Warning lamp ................................. 237
Warning lamp (function) ................... 40
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 136
Reversing feature
Roller sunblind ................................. 89
Side windows ................................... 83
Tailgate ............................................ 78
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 89
Roof carrier ........................................ 256
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 285
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 339
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 249
Inserting/removing ........................ 248
Removing ....................................... 249
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Seat
Correct driver's seat position ........... 92
Seat belts
Adjusting the height ......................... 43
Cleaning ......................................... 285
Correct usage .................................. 42
Fastening ......................................... 43
Important safety guidelines ............. 41
Introduction ..................................... 41
Releasing ......................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 230
Warning lamp (function) ................... 44
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 94
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 94
Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 96
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port .................................................. 96
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95
Cleaning the cover ......................... 284
Folding the backrest (rear com-
partment) forwards/back .............. 254
Important safety notes .................... 92
Seat heating problem ...................... 97
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 101
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 96
Section
Cargo compartment ......................... 77
Securing a load
see Securing cargo
Index
17
Securing cargo ..................................255
Selecting a gear
see Automatic transmission
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 284
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 282
Service menu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................198
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 337
Coolant (engine) ............................ 337
Engine oil ....................................... 336
Fuel ................................................ 334
Important safety notes .................. 334
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 338
Washer fluid ................................... 338
Setting a speed
see Cruise control
Setting the air distribution ...............120
Setting the airflow ............................ 120
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 200
On-board computer ....................... 198
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 201
Side impact air bag .............................46
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 216
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 281
Convenience closing feature ............ 85
Convenience opening feature ..........84
Important safety information ........... 83
Opening/closing .............................. 84
Problem (malfunction) .....................86
Resetting .........................................86
Reversing feature .............................83
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Situation-dependent braking
assistance
Function/notes ................................ 63
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 72
Changing the programming .............71
Checking the battery .......................72
Convenience closing feature ............ 85
Convenience opening feature .......... 84
Display message ............................ 229
Door central locking/unlocking .......69
Important safety notes .................... 69
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 71
Loss .................................................73
Mechanical key ................................ 71
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 125
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73
Starting the engine ........................ 127
SmartKey positions (ignition
lock) ....................................................125
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Snow chains ...................................... 307
Sockets
Center console .............................. 260
General notes ................................ 260
Luggage compartment ................... 260
Rear compartment ......................... 260
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 243
Special seat belt retractor .................. 54
Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the addi-
tional speedometer ........................ 199
Digital ............................................ 193
In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
18
Index
Segments ...................................... 188
Selecting the display unit ............... 198
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 65
Warning lamp ................................. 236
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 215
Switching on/off ........................... 103
Start-off assist
Activating ....................................... 166
Important safety notes .................. 166
Start/Stop button
Removing ....................................... 126
Starting the engine ........................ 127
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 126
STEER CONTROL .................................. 67
Steering
Display message ............................ 228
Steering assistant STEER CON-
TROL
see STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97
Button overview ............................... 33
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 189
Cleaning ......................................... 284
Important safety notes .................... 97
Paddle shifters ............................... 140
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 140
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 201
Stowage compartments
Armrest (front) ............................... 251
Armrest (under) ............................. 252
Center console .............................. 251
Center console (rear) ..................... 252
Cup holders ................................... 257
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 251
Glove box ....................................... 251
Important safety information ......... 250
Map pockets .................................. 252
Stowage net ................................... 252
Stowage net ....................................... 252
Summer opening
see Convenience opening feature
Summer tires ..................................... 306
Sun visor ............................................ 258
Suspension setting
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 168
SVHC (Substances of Very High
Concern) ............................................... 28
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 122
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 248
T
Tachometer ........................................ 188
Tail lamps
see Lights
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 227
Emergency unlocking ....................... 82
Important safety notes .................... 77
Limiting the opening angle ............... 82
Obstruction detection ...................... 78
Opening dimensions ...................... 339
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 78
Opening/closing automatically
from inside ....................................... 81
Opening/closing automatically
from outside .................................... 79
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 334
Information .................................... 332
Tires/wheels ................................. 329
Vehicle data ................................... 339
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 196
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 246
Authorizing a mobile phone via
the device manager (connecting) ... 247
Connecting a mobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 247
Index
19
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 246
Display message ............................ 228
Introduction ...................................195
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195
Number from the phone book ........196
Redialing ........................................ 196
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 196
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................242
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 189
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............200
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............200
Outside temperature ......................188
Setting (climate control) ................ 119
Transmission oil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 200
Through-loading feature ................... 253
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 201
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 311
Checking manually ........................ 310
Display message ............................ 223
Maximum ....................................... 310
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 291
Notes ............................................. 309
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 291
Recommended ............................... 307
Tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem
General notes ................................ 310
Important safety notes .................. 311
Restarting ...................................... 311
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 313
Function/notes .............................311
General notes ................................ 311
Important safety notes .................. 312
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 315
Restarting ...................................... 314
Warning lamp ................................. 241
Warning message .......................... 313
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 289
Important safety notes .................. 289
Storage location ............................ 287
Tire pressure not reached .............. 291
Tire pressure reached .................... 291
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 324
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 323
Bar (definition) ............................... 323
Changing a wheel .......................... 325
Characteristics .............................. 323
Checking ........................................ 304
Curb weight (definition) ................. 324
Definition of terms ......................... 323
Direction of rotation ...................... 326
Display message ............................ 223
Distribution of the vehicle occu-
pants (definition) ............................ 325
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 323
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 322
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing) (definition) .............................. 324
General notes ................................ 329
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 324
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) ......................... 324
Important safety notes .................. 304
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 324
Information on driving .................... 304
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 324
Labeling (overview) ........................ 320
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 325
Load index ..................................... 322
Load index (definition) ................... 324
M+S tires ....................................... 306
Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 324
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 324
Maximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 324
Maximum tire load ......................... 322
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 324
20
Index
MOExtended tires .......................... 306
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 325
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) .....................................324
Replacing ....................................... 325
Service life ..................................... 305
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 325
Speed rating (definition) ................ 324
Storing ...........................................326
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 323
Summer tires ................................. 306
Temperature .................................. 319
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 325
Tire bead (definition) ......................325
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 324
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 324
Tire size (data) ............................... 329
Tire size designation, load-bear-
ing capacity, speed rating .............. 320
Tire tread ....................................... 305
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 325
Total load limit (definition) ............. 325
Traction ......................................... 319
Traction (definition) ....................... 325
Tread wear ..................................... 319
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 319
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 323
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 325
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 324
see Flat tire
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether ............................................ 56
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 301
Important safety notes .................. 298
Installing the towing eye ................ 299
Removing the towing eye ............... 299
Towing
Permitted towing methods ............ 300
Towing a trailer
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 66
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 298
Installing the towing eye ................ 299
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 301
Removing the towing eye ............... 299
Transporting the vehicle ................ 300
With both axles on the ground ....... 300
With the front axle raised ............... 299
Towing eye ......................................... 287
Traction system
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 134
Transporting the vehicle .................. 300
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill ..................................... 156
Driving downhill ............................. 156
Maximum gradient-climbing
capability ....................................... 156
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 284
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 192
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 192
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 193
Trunk
Emergency release button ............... 83
Opening (from outside the vehi-
cle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .............. 80
Trunk lid
see Tailgate
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 214
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 108
Switching on/off ........................... 104
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 332
Installation ..................................... 332
Transmission output (maximum) .... 332
Index
21
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 75
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 200
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ...............................................249
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........259
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Display message ............................ 225
Equipment ....................................... 26
Individual settings .......................... 198
Limited Warranty .............................28
Loading .......................................... 316
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 77
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 69
Lowering ........................................ 329
Maintenance .................................... 26
Parking for a long period ................ 148
Pulling away ................................... 128
Raising ........................................... 327
REACH Regulation ........................... 28
Reporting problems ......................... 28
Securing from rolling away ............ 326
Transporting .................................. 300
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 76
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 69
Vehicle data ................................... 339
Vehicle battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 339
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ............ 340
Maximum gradient climbing abil-
ity .................................................. 340
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 339
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 77
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 333
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 287
Ventilation
Setting the vents ........................... 123
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 195
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
VIN
Seat ............................................... 334
Type plate ...................................... 333
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 233
Active Brake Assist ........................ 240
Brakes ........................................... 232
Check Engine ................................. 238
Coolant .......................................... 238
Distance warning ........................... 240
ESP
®
.............................................. 235
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 236
Fuel tank ........................................ 238
Overview .......................................... 32
Reserve fuel ................................... 238
Restraint system ............................ 237
Seat belt ........................................ 230
SPORT handling mode ................... 236
Tire pressure monitor .................... 241
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 228
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 242
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 329
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 329
Wheel chock ...................................... 326
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 325
Checking ........................................ 304
Cleaning ......................................... 281
Emergency spare wheel ................. 330
22
Index
Important safety notes .................. 304
Information on driving .................... 304
Interchanging/changing ................ 325
Mounting a new wheel ................... 328
Removing a wheel .......................... 328
Storing ........................................... 326
Tightening torque ........................... 329
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 329
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel .......................... 326
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 211
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 120
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 276
Important safety notes .................. 338
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 228
Problem (malfunction) ................... 112
Rear window wiper ........................ 110
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 110
Switching on/off ........................... 109
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 153
Snow chains .................................. 307
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 306
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 306
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 282
Important safety notes .................. 110
Replacing (rear window) ................ 112
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 284
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 120
Index
23
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehi-
cle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted infor-
mation on your vehicle's equipment and multi-
media system. You can call up the Digital
Operator's Manual via the multimedia system.
i
You will not incur any costs when calling
up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connect-
ing to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of
the Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you
can access many of the different topics cov-
ered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To
access the vehicle interior section, select
the "Vehicle interior" view.
R
Keyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for
a keyword by entering characters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sections in the
contents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
ted for safety reasons while driving.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's
Manual
X
Press the Ø button in the center con-
sole.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X
Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item
by turning 3 or pressing 7 the control-
ler.
X
Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating the Digital Operator's
Manual
General notes
Please observe the information about the
operation of the controller (Y page 243).
Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means
of a visual search, a keyword search or using
the contents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
the controller.
X
To display in full-screen or animation:
slide 8 the controller to the left :.
X
To select information texts or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X
To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X
To exit a content page: select % sym-
bol ?.
X
To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol
A.
X
To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, Õ or
Ø button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital
Operator's Manual remains open in the
background.
24
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affec-
ted by these factors:
R
operating conditions of your vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer
need them.
R
a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain a safe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine
speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-
sumption.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you
to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate
or re-use them. Observe the relevant environ-
mental rules and regulations when disposing
of materials. In this way you will help to pro-
tect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
major assemblies and parts which are of the
same quality as new parts. They are covered
by the same Limited Warranty entitlements
as new parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrument cluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
tems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety which
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
25
Introduction
Z
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rele-
vant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal
quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories
that have been specifically approved for your
vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-
tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi-
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-
ters provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-
Benz parts (Y page 333).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all mod-
els and all standard and optional equipment
of your vehicle available at the time of this
Operator's Manual going to print. Country-
specific differences are possible. Bear in
mind that your vehicle may not feature all
functions described here. This also applies
to safety-relevant systems and functions.
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions
and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Maintenance
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with
you when taking the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
advisor will enter every service into your Main-
tenance Booklet on your behalf.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle
document wallet.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
ing you in a timely manner should the need
arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
26
Service and vehicle operation
Introduction
Operating safety
Declarations of conformity
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera-
tion is subject to the two following two condi-
tions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful
interference, and 2) These devices must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device."
Diagnostic connector
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, which is approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict
the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed
pedal. The operating and road safety of the
vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an
accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not
use loose floormats and do not place floor-
mats on top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equip-
ment on the diagnostics connection is used,
the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This may
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require-
ments of the next emissions test during the
main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the neces-
sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-
tions to correctly carry out the work required
on your vehicle. This is especially the case for
work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-
let.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driv-
ing your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Operating safety
27
Introduction
Z
Information about the REACH decree
The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) no.
1907/2006, Article 33) lays down an informa-
tion obligation for substances of very high con-
cern (SVHC).
Daimler AG acts in good faith to avoid using
these SVHCs and to allow the customer to
handle these substances safely. In accordance
with supplier information and internal product
information from Daimler AG, SVHCs that
account for more than 0.1 percent by weight
of individual products in this vehicle are
known.
More detailed information can be found at the
following addresses:
R
http://www.daimler.com/reach (German
version)
R
http://www.daimler.com/reach/en
(English version)
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Limited Warranty
!
Observe the notes in this Operator's Man-
ual regarding the correct operation of your
vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle.
Damage to the vehicle which is caused by
violation of these notes is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the
new or used-vehicle warranty.
QR code for rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
rescue card for your vehicle. The current res-
cue card contains the most important informa-
tion about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g.
the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components.
For example, fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components, e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator
pedal position
R
malfunctions and defects in important sys-
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions
in special driving situations, e.g. air bag
deployment, intervention of stability control
systems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
ture
28
Data storage
Introduction
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the
service network (including the manufacturer)
using special diagnostic testers. More detailed
information is obtained from it, if required.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the
information is deleted from the malfunction
memory or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are
conceivable in which this technical data, in
connection with other information (if neces-
sary, under consultation with an authorized
expert), could be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been
contractually agreed upon with the customer
allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by
the vehicle as well. The additional functions
include, for example, vehicle location in case
of an emergency.
COMAND/Mercedes me connect
(Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
Mercedes me connect, additional data about
the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle
in certain situations, and the location of the
vehicle is compiled through COMAND or the
Mercedes me connect system.
For additional information, please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the Mercedes me connect
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with
an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehi-
cle's systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data relating to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-triv-
ial crash situation occurs; no data are recor-
ded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender,
age and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee-
ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR,
and special equipment is required. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that
have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can read the information by
accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal
matters as a tool in accident reconstruction,
accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the
Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to
extract data from the EDR is commercially
Data storage
29
Introduction
Z
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA")
expressly disclaims any and all liability arising
from the extraction of this information by
unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or,
if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local govern-
ment; in connection with or arising out of liti-
gation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and
affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
ponent may result in a malfunction of the
Restraint System Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-
ted. This means that in the event of such con-
flict, the federal regulation governs. As of Feb-
ruary 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relat-
ing to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Registered trademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trade-
marks of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc.
R
Logic7
®
is a registered trademark of Har-
man International Industries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
30
Information on copyright
Introduction
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers 140
;
Combination switch 104
=
Instrument cluster 32
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever 134
B
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 173
C
Overhead control panel 38
Function Page
D
Climate control systems 113
E
Ignition lock 125
F
Adjusts the steering wheel 97
G
Cruise control lever 157
H
Electric parking brake 146
I
Light switch 102
J
Diagnostics connection 27
K
Opens the hood 273
Cockpit
31
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer with seg-
ments 188
Warning and indicator
lamps:
L Low-beam headlamps
103
T Parking lamps
103
K High-beam headlamps
104
÷ ESP
®
235
Electric parking brake
applied (red)
F (USA only)
! (Canada only)
237
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 237
· Distance warning
240
å ESP
®
OFF
235
! ABS malfunctioning
233
Braking 232
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
;
#! Turn signals
104
Function Page
=
Multifunction display 191
?
Tachometer 188
6 Restraint system
40
ü Seat belt not fastened
230
M SPORT handling mode
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 236
R Rear fog lamp
103
N Fog lamps
103
; Check Engine
238
h Tire pressure monitor
241
A
Coolant temperature gauge 189
Warning and indicator
lamps:
? Coolant too hot/cold
238
B
Fuel level indicator
Warning and indicator
lamps:
æ Reserve fuel
238
C
Instrument cluster lighting 188
32
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 191
;
Multimedia system display
=
~ Rejects or ends a call
6 Makes or accepts a
call
Further telephone functions 195
WXAdjusts volume
8 Mute
? Switches on voice-
operated control for naviga-
tion or the Voice Control
System
Function Page
?
ò Opens the menu list
9:Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
% Back
Operates the on-board com-
puter 189
? Switches off voice-
operated control for naviga-
tion or the Voice Control
System
i In vehicles with multimedia system
Audio 20 you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on voice-controlled navigation in the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions
i In vehicles with multimedia system
COMAND you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the DVD changer or single DVD drive
in the Digital Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
Multifunction steering wheel
33
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Multimedia system; see the
Digital Operator's Manual
;
c Seat heating
96
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
AMG adaptive sport suspen-
sion system (left side) 168
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
adjusts the exhaust flap of
the AMG performance
exhaust system (right side) 130
=
à Downhill Speed Regu-
lation 169
?
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC 173
Function Page
A
è ECO start/stop func-
tion 129
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
104
C
PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
tor lamps 40
D
DYNAMIC SELECT button 132
å Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles: ESP
®
65
E
Activates the driving dynam-
ics display (vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package) 171
34
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
:
Ashtray 259
Cigarette lighter 259
Socket 260
Stowage compartment 250
;
Cup holder 257
=
Cup holder 257
Function Page
?
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 250
A
Multimedia system control-
ler; see Digital Operator's
Manual
Center console
35
At a glance
i
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Function Page
:
Ashtray 259
Cigarette lighter 259
Socket 260
Stowage compartment 250
;
Selector lever 136
=
Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting) 140
Function Page
?
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 133
A
Cup holder 257
B
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface 250
C
Multimedia system control-
ler; see Digital Operator's
Manual
36
Center console
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:
Opens the door 75
;
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 75
=
r45= Saves
the seat and exterior mirror
settings 101
?
Adjusts the seats electri-
cally 94
A
7 Z ö \
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 98
Function Page
B
W Opens/closes the side
windows 84
C
n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
passenger compartment
59
D
q Opens the cargo com-
partment 79
Door control panel
37
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
u Switches the rear inte-
rior lighting on/off 105
;
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 105
=
| Switches the front
interior lighting/automatic
interior lighting control off 105
?
ï MB Info call button
263
A
Rear view mirror 99
B
Sets the compass 271
C
Buttons for the garage door
opener 268
D
G Emergency call/SOS
button 261
Function Page
E
F Breakdown assistance
call button 263
F
Eyeglasses compartment 251
G
3 Opens/closes the
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 88
H
c Switches the front
interior lighting on 105
I
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 105
38
Overhead control panel
At a glance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press and hold the
! button : for approx. one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an
accident. The restraint system can also reduce
the forces to which vehicle occupants are sub-
jected during an accident.
The restraint system includes the following
components:
R
seat belt system
R
air bags
R
child restraint system
R
child seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 42)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 92)
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 92).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 44).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient,
the air bags are not deployed. When an acci-
dent occurs, only the air bags that increase
protection in that particular accident situation
are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags
generally do not protect against objects pene-
trating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 51).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information
on children traveling with you in the vehicle as
well as on child restraint systems
(Y page 53).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in
an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for
example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
Occupant safety
39
Safety
Z
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
for further information contact our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800 FOR-MERCEDES
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and
at regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a
few seconds after the vehicle is started. The
components of the restraint system are in
operational readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignition is
switched on
R
does not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as
intended during an accident. This can affect
for example the Emergency Tensioning
Device or the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :
and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS).
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60
seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps
are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF):
the front-passenger front air bag is able to
deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag must either be deactivated or enabled;
see the following points. You must make sure
of this both before and during a journey.
R
Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the
installed child restraint system, and the age
and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to
observe the notes on the "Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS)" (Y page 47) and on
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53).
There you will also find instructions on rear-
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front-passenger seat.
R
All other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
40
Occupant safety
Safety
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated (Y page 47). Be
sure to observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags"
(Y page 44). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle roll-
ing over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occu-
pants coming into contact with parts of the
vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehi-
cle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep
the vehicle occupant in the best position in
relation to the air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the
rear
R
Seat belt force limiters for the front seat
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
wise, in the event of an accident the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and the side
impact air bag, in addition to other systems,
may be triggered and have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehi-
cle occupants should correctly fasten their
seat belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can-
not perform its intended protective function.
An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also
cause injuries, for example, in the event of
an accident or when braking or changing
direction abruptly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened correctly and
are sitting properly.
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 42)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 92)
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the
backrest to an almost vertical position.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
you could slide underneath the seat belt and
sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the back-
rest is in an almost vertical position and that
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons
under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional
restraint systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 53) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 47)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their inten-
ded protective function if:
R
they are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been
modified.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or dam-
aged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an
accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning
Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to
deploy when necessary. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this
seat is designed for the standard three-point
seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat
belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the
restraint system cannot provide the best level
of protection.
G
WARNING
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
Never modify the seat belt system.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 41).
Every vehicle occupant must observe the fol-
lowing notes to ensure a properly worn seat
belt can provide full protection. Also make
sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that:
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
R
the seat belt is pulled tight across your body
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted
42
Occupant safety
Safety
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck or be routed under your
arm or behind your back. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
R
the lap belt is taut and passes across your
lap as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt down
to your hip joint and pull it tight using the
shoulder section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,
store these in a suitable place.
R
only one person is using a seat belt
Infants and children must never travel sit-
ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objects are never secured with a seat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
between a person and the seat, e.g. cush-
ions.
Seat belts are only intended to secure and
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 250).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 42).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 92).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
outlet.
X
Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt
buckle :.
X
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across
your body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the
shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X
To raise: slide the belt outlet up.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X
To lower: hold belt outlet release = and
slide the belt outlet down.
X
Let go of belt outlet release = in the
desired position and make sure that the belt
outlet engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found
under "Special seat belt retractor"
(Y page 54).
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the
belt back.
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may
light up continuously or flash. In addition,
there may be a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If the front doors
are closed and the driver's or front-passenger
seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up again after the six
seconds. As soon as the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are fastened or a front
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. The warning tone switches off
after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt
is fastened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warn-
ing tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds
with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or
until the driver or front passenger have fas-
tened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
warning is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an airbag can be rec-
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An airbag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt.
When deployed, an airbag can increase the
protection provided for the respective vehicle
occupant.
Not all airbags are deployed in an accident.
The various airbags work independently of
each other (Y page 51).
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an airbag due to the high speed at
which the airbag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the
greatest possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
All vehicle occupants must observe the follow-
ing notes to avoid risks posed by the airbag
when it deploys.
R
Adjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the
seat is in an almost upright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat
position must allow the vehicle to be driven
safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
R
Always lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be
in the deployment area of the airbags.
R
Always keep your feet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
erwise be in the deployment area of the air-
bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
44
Occupant safety
Safety
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
cannot be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Always secure children under twelve years
of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suit-
able child restraint systems.
R
Child restraint systems should be installed
on the rear seats.
R
Secure a child to the front-passenger seat
only when the front-passenger front airbag
is deactivated, and then only in a rearward-
facing child restraint system. The front-
passenger front airbag is deactivated when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit continuously (Y page 40).
R
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 47) and on "Children
in the vehicle" (Y page 53) in addition to
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may restrict
the airbag from functioning correctly. To
avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air-
bag as it deploys, vehicle occupants must
ensure the following points.
Before commencing your journey, ensure that:
R
there are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air-
bag
R
there are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
R
there are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
ment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side
windows, rear side trim or side walls
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are
in the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place
G
WARNING
If you modify the cover of an air bag or affix
objects such as stickers to it, the air bag
can no longer perform its intended function.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the cover of an air bag or affix
objects to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located
in the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to
the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly anymore. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. There is an
increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors. Always have work on the doors or
door paneling carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Front air bags
!
Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This could cause the sys-
tem to identify the seat as being occupied.
In the event of an accident, the restraint
systems on the front-passenger side may be
triggered and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (Y page 40).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, based on the OCS weight sen-
sor readings, detects that the front-
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
passenger seat is occupied (Y page 47).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not lit (Y page 47)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steer-
ing column and front-passenger knee bag ;
under the glove box. The driver's and front-
passenger knee bags are triggered together
with the front air bags.
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they
are designed to do. In addition, the opera-
tion of the occupant classification system
(OCS) could be adversely affected. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
bolster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers
additional pelvis protection for occupants in
the front seats. However, it does not protect
the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact, the side impact air bag is
deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front passenger
side deploys under the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the side impact air bag on the front
passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-
dent situation occurs. In this case, deployment
is independent of whether the front passenger
seat is occupied or not.
46
Occupant safety
Safety
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or
arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact, the window curtain air bag is
deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(Y page 51).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the window curtain air bag
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifi-
cation, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
R
sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
be sure to observe the correct positioning of
the child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g.
a cushion. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion of the front-passenger seat. The back-
rest of the forward-facing child restraint sys-
tem must lie as flat as possible against the
backrest of the front-passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,
or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must
light up simultaneously for approximately six
seconds.
The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is
able to deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag display message appears in the instru-
ment cluster (Y page 213). When the front-
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-
passenger front air bag both before and during
the journey.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag
is disabled. It will not be deployed in the
event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function. A person in the
front-passenger seat could then, for exam-
ple, come into contact with the vehicle's
interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the dashboard. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled or
disabled in accordance with the person in
the front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-
passenger front air bag can deploy in the
event of an accident. The child could be
struck by the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT
AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 51).
48
Occupant safety
Safety
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat
too close to the dashboard, in the event of
an accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
The front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the self-test and remains lit.
This indicates that the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in a stand-
ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
the self-test and remains lit. This indicates
that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
child, in a standard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp can go out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is activated. The result of the classification
is dependent on, among other factors, the
child restraint system and the child's stat-
ure. It is recommended that you install the
child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up and remains
lit after the self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes
out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a
person of smaller stature can sit on a rear
seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of corresponding stature,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp goes out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure
to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-
cle" (Y page 53).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument clus-
ter and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-
essary repair work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Deployment of the driver's air bag does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
deploys as well. The Occupant Classification
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
either enabled or deactivated.
Self-check by the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS)
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do
not both light up during the self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at
all in the event of an accident with high
deceleration. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may
not be used. Do not install a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat. Have
the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident.
In this case, the front-passenger front air
bag cannot perform its intended protective
function, e.g. when a person is seated in the
front-passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per-
son in the front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the
front-passenger seat must not be used. Do
not install a child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS
operation. This could result in the front-
passenger air bag not functioning as inten-
ded during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must,
as far as possible, be resting on the back-
rest of the front-passenger seat. Always
comply with the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation instructions.
After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lamp displays the status of the front-
passenger front airbag (Y page 47). If the
front-passenger front airbag is enabled, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights
up for 60 seconds and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 51).
50
Occupant safety
Safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 50).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains
lit, even though the
front-passenger seat is
occupied by an adult or
a person of a stature
corresponding to that of
an adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-
son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 47).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
front-passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied by the
weight of a child up
to twelve months old
in a child restraint
system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possi-
ble against the backrest of the front passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and
the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X
Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off
and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do
not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It
is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a
suitable rear seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tension-
ing Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop in order to have a deployed
air bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective func-
tion for the vehicle occupants in the event of a
crash.
G
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their
intended protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and some powder may also be released. The
6 restraint system warning lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released generally
does not constitute a health hazard, but it may
cause short-term breathing difficulties in peo-
ple with asthma or other respiratory problems.
Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave
the vehicle immediately or open the window in
order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
rial, which may require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
tant physical data relating to vehicle decelera-
tion or acceleration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during a head-on or
rear-end collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 40)
R
the seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
the belt buckle of the respective front seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
passenger compartment are triggered inde-
pendently of the lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bags as well as driver's and front-
passenger knee bags
R
Window curtain air bag, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag is either enabled or disabled. The front-
passenger front air bag can be deployed in an
accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is off. Observe the information
on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(Y page 40).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.
The activation threshold of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and the air bags is deter-
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-
eration or acceleration which occurs at various
points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. Deployment should take place
in good time at the start of the collision.
52
Occupant safety
Safety
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehi-
cle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformed are affected and the rate of deceler-
ation is not high. Conversely, air bags may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longi-
tudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
deceleration occurs as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the
applicable components of the restraint system
are deployed independently of each other
depending on the apparent type of accident.
R
Side impact air bags on the side where the
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use
of the seat belt on the driver's seat and
outer seats in the second row
The side impact air bag on the front
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front passenger
seat
R
Window curtain air bag on the side of
impact, independently of the use of the seat
belt and independently of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-
tem determines that deployment can offer
additional protection in this situation
R
Window curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the
seat belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-
dent. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the apparent type of accident:
R
Head-on collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched on
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front side windows are lowered
R
the engine is switched off and the fuel sup-
ply is cut off
R
vehicles with Mercedes me connect: auto-
matic emergency call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children
secured in the front-passenger seat. For this
reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that
you install a child restraint system on a rear
seat. Children are generally better protected
there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notes in this section in addition to the
Children in the vehicle
53
Safety
Z
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification sys-
tem (OCS)". (Y page 47)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjec-
ted to prolonged exposure to extreme heat
or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly
even fatal. Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposed to
direct sunlight, let it cool down before secur-
ing the child in it. Never leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly. Particular attention must be paid
to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 42).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a three-point seat belt can be properly fas-
tened without a booster seat.
Special seatbelt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt
retractor is disabled and the inertia real
draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat
belt cannot be immediately refastened.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reacti-
vate the special seat belt retractor and
secure the child restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
outlet.
X
Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
54
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
tivating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Press the release button of the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back
towards the belt sash guide.
The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
ted.
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the center rear seat, the rear seat
armrest must be folded back as far as it will
go.
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot pro-
tect as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions and the notes on use. Please
ensure, that the base of the child restraint
system is always resting completely on the
seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cush-
ions, under or behind the child restraint sys-
tem. Only use child restraint systems with
the original cover designed for them. Only
replace damaged covers with genuine cov-
ers.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come
loose in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or a sudden change in direction. The
child restraint system could be thrown
about, striking vehicle occupants. There is
an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading
guidelines" (Y page 250).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjec-
ted to a load in an accident can no longer
protect as intended. The child cannot then
be restrained in the event of an accident,
heavy braking or sudden changes of direc-
tion. There is an increased risk of injury,
possibly even fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the
securing systems on the child restraint sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop, before you install a child restraint sys-
tem again.
The securing systems of child restraint sys-
tems are:
R
the seat belt system
R
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
R
the Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front passenger seat, be sure to observe
the information on the "Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS)" (Y page 47). There you will
also find information on disabling the front
passenger front air bag.
Children in the vehicle
55
Safety
Z
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found on
an instruction label on the child restraint sys-
tem. This confirmation can also be found in
the installation instructions that are included
with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
securing system
G
WARNING
For LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
tems in which the child is secured using the
safety belt integrated in the child restraint
system, the maximum permissible weight of
the child and child restraint system together
is 73 lbs (33 kg).
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg), the
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system
with integrated safety belt no longer offers
sufficient protection. The LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) child seat securing system may be over-
loaded, and the child may not be restrained
in an accident, for example. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child and the child restraint system
together weigh more than 73 lbs (33 kg),
use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system in which the child is also
secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also
secure the child restraint system with the
Top Tether belt, if available.
Regularly check that the permissible gross
weight of the child together with the child
restraint system is still maintained.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings
!
When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
could otherwise be damaged.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings :.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized secur-
ing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are instal-
led on the left and right of the rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehi-
cle's seat belt system. Install the child seat
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the
vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury
even further. If the child restraint system is
equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should
always be used.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked,
they could fold forwards in the event of an
56
Children in the vehicle
Safety
accident, heavy braking or sudden changes
of direction. As a result, child restraint sys-
tems cannot perform their intended protec-
tive function. Rear seat backrests that are
not locked can also cause additional inju-
ries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat
backrests so that they are in an upright posi-
tion.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,
the red lock verification indicator will be visible
(Y page 254).
Top Tether anchorages
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the
rear side of the seat backrests.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X
Move head restraint : up.
X
Route Top Tether belt ? under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Vehicles without adjustable head
restraints:
X
Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route
Top Tether belt ? centrally over head
restraint :.
or
X
Top Tether belt with two belt straps:
route one Top Tether belt ? to the left and
one to the right past the side of head
restraint :.
All vehicles:
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation instructions when
doing so.
X
Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether
belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.
Make sure that:
R
Top Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ; as shown
R
Top Tether belt ? is not twisted
R
Top Tether belt ? is routed between the
seat backrest and cargo compartment
cover if the cargo compartment cover is
installed
X
Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X
Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 96). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt ?.
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children
secured in the front-passenger seat. For this
reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that
Children in the vehicle
57
Safety
Z
you install the child restraint system on a rear
seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 47).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise
as a result of:
R
an incorrectly categorized person in the
front-passenger seat
R
deactivating the front passenger front air
bag unintentionally
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If circumstances require you to secure a child
in a rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat, always make sure
that the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
vated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is lit continuously (Y page 40),
is the front passenger front air bag deactiva-
ted.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a
forward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
retract the seat cushion length. The entire
base of the child restraint system must always
rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not
touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the
head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat
backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul-
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi-
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forward and down from
the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the
vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger
seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
R
open doors, thus endangering other peo-
ple or road users
R
exit the vehicle and be caught by oncom-
ing traffic
R
operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in
the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle,
always take the key with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Override feature for:
R
the rear doors (Y page 59)
R
the rear side windows (Y page 59)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
58
Children in the vehicle
Safety
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjec-
ted to prolonged exposure to extreme heat
or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly
even fatal. Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposed to
direct sunlight, let it cool down before secur-
ing the child in it. Never leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehi-
cle is unlocked, the door can be opened from
the outside.
X
To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :.
X
Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
X
To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win-
dows
X
To activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the driv-
er's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, opera-
tion is possible using the switches in the
rear compartment.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unsupervised or unse-
cured in the vehicle, they may press buttons
or switches, for instance.
In this way, animals may:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
switch systems on or off and thereby
endanger other road users
Furthermore, unsecured animals may be
flung around inside the vehicle in the event
of an accident or abrupt steering or braking
maneuver, and thereby injure vehicle occu-
pants. There is a risk of accident and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle.
Always secure animals properly when driv-
ing, for instance with a suitable pet carrier.
Pets in the vehicle
59
Safety
Z
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 60)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 61)
R
Active Brake Assist (Y page 61)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 63)
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 67)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 67)
R
STEER CONTROL (Y page 67)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. Driving safety
systems are merely aids designed to assist
driving.
You are responsible for maintaining the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time, and for staying in
lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit
the prevailing road and weather conditions and
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there is
adequate contact between the tires and the
road surface. Please pay special attention to
the notes on tires, recommended minimum
tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 305).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
chains. Only in this way will the driving safety
systems described in this section work as
effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could
lock when braking. The steerability and
braking characteristics would be severely
affected. There is an increased danger of
skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 233) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 204).
Braking
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as
a reminder to take extra care while driving.
Off-road ABS
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 170).
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
60
Driving safety systems
Safety
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This
limits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking dis-
tance in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Active Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance
warning function with an autonomous braking
function and a situation-dependent brake
boosting effect.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling
in front or reduce the effects of such a colli-
sion.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a
risk of collision, you will be warned visually
and acoustically. If you do not react to the vis-
ual collision warning or the warning tone,
autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
critical situation, Active Brake Assist supports
you with a situation-dependent brake boosting
effect.
Important safety notes
Detection of hazardous situations can be par-
ticularly impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
There is snow or heavy rain
R
There is interference by other radar sources
R
There are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
A narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
A vehicle is traveling in front on a different
line
R
You are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just
been carried out
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 124).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to collisions
at low speeds where no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle is apparent.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is active after every igni-
tion cycle.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (Y page 197) in the on-board com-
puter. When deactivated, the distance warning
function and the autonomous braking function
are also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
play.
If you have activated DSR, Active Brake Assist
is deactivated. For further information on DSR,
see (Y page 169).
Driving safety systems
61
Safety
Z
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
will be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not
react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevail-
ing road and traffic conditions.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot
always clearly identify objects and complex
traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and do not rely solely on the dis-
tance warning function.
Function
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warn-
ing.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as
stopped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance
warning signal in a critical situation, Active
Brake Assist can assist the driver with the
autonomous braking function.
The autonomous braking function:
R
gives the driver more time to react to critical
driving situations
R
can help the driver to avoid an accident or
R
can reduce the effects of an accident
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving
objects
R
4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
objects
R
4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the autonomous braking func-
tion to intervene.
62
Driving safety systems
Safety
Situation-dependent braking assis-
tance
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
With the help of the radar sensor system,
Active Brake Assist can detect obstacles that
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of collision
with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake
pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you
apply the brakes forcefully, situation-depend-
ent braking assistance adapts to the situation
and automatically increases the brake pres-
sure to a degree appropriate to the traffic sit-
uation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance pro-
vides braking assistance in hazardous situa-
tions at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses
radar sensor technology to assess the traffic
situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is
capable of reacting to moving objects that
have already been detected as such at least
once over the period of observation, up to
vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
(250 km/h).
Situation-dependent braking assistance can
also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle
speeds of around 44 mph (70 km/h).
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal
R
there is no longer any danger of a collision
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then
deactivated.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
Active Brake Assist does not react:
R
to persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani-
mals
R
to approaching vehicles
R
to cross traffic
R
on bends
As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot inter-
vene in all critical situations. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be prepared to brake.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake. Terminate
the intervention in a non-critical driving sit-
uation.
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene.
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due
to a malfunction in the radar sensor system,
the brake system is still available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one or
more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehi-
Driving safety systems
63
Safety
Z
cle. The engine output is also modified to keep
the vehicle on the desired course within physi-
cal limits. ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling
away on wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also
stabilize the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
. On vehi-
cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP
®
.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP
®
.
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
tem)
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 170).
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an acci-
dent.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP
®
checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your
vehicle with the front axle raised, it is impor-
tant that you observe the notes on ESP
®
(Y page 299).
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP
®
is not
available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 235) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 204).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes out
before beginning the journey, ESP
®
is auto-
matically active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
stops moving. The engine starts automatically
when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status.
Example: if ESP
®
was deactivated before the
engine was switched off, ESP
®
remains deacti-
vated when the engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
64
Driving safety systems
Safety
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
You can deactivate or activate ESP
®
via the
on-board computer (Y page 197).
ESP
®
deactivated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
ESP
®
activated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;
nor is it activated if you brake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
.
R
STEER CONTROL is no longer active.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
SPORT handling mode is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the
situations described in the following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
R
on specially designated roads when the
vehicle's own oversteering and understeer-
ing characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and
experienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Driving safety systems
65
Safety
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT handling mode
SPORT handling mode message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFFOFF message appears in the multi-
function display.
X
To activate ESP
®
: briefly press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP
®
ONON message appears in the multifunction
display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.
ESP
®
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited
degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
R
ESP
®
only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
The engine's torque is only restricted to a
limited degree and the drive wheels may
start to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
ting action for better traction on loose surfa-
ces.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-
ting action for better traction on loose surfa-
ces.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;
nor is it activated if you brake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Off-road ESP
®
An ESP
®
system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 170).
Offroad ESP
®
intervenes with a delay if there
is oversteering or understeering, thus improv-
ing traction.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
swerve, ESP
®
assists you in this situation.
ESP
®
slows the vehicle down by braking and
limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
trailer combination has stabilized.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to pre-
vent the vehicle/trailer combination from
66
Driving safety systems
Safety
swerving. Trailers with a high center of grav-
ity can tip over before ESP
®
can detect this.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing
the brake firmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization is active above
speeds of about 65 km/h.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization does not work if
ESP
®
is deactivated or disabled because of a
malfunction.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases
the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving
style to the different handling characteris-
tics. Have the brake system checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Please observe the information on warning
and indicator lamps (Y page 233)
(Y page 233) as well as on display messages
(Y page 206).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition
to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also
has the HOLD function (Y page 165) and hill
start assist (Y page 128).
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabiliza-
tion.
This steering assistance is provided in particu-
lar if:
R
both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
R
the vehicle begins to skid
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 60).
No steering assistance is provided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
R
the steering is malfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off
and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-
one can start the engine if a valid SmartKey
has been left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),
Protection against theft
67
Safety
Z
the system is not operational. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X
To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
a door
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the tailgate
R
the hood
X
To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 125).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-
Key must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not stopped, even if you close the
open door that triggered it, for example.
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Mercedes me connect
emergency call system automatically sends
a message to the Customer Center. This is
done either by text message or data con-
nection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
R
you have subscribed to the Mercedes me
connect service
R
the Mercedes me connect service has
been activated properly
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available
68
Protection against theft
Safety
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before inserting the SmartKey into the igni-
tion lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:
do not keep the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not
be detected, e.g. when starting the engine
using the Start/Stop button.
SmartKey functions
:
& To lock the vehicle
;
F To open the tailgate
=
% To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated
X
To lock: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the tailgate
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control; see Digital Operator's Manual.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 200).
X
To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the
F button until the tailgate opens
(Y page 79).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function:
SmartKey
69
Opening and closing
Z
X
To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is
located in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle, press the F button on the SmartKey
(Y page 79).
When the tailgate closes you can then
release the button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
Locking and unlocking
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con-
ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by
using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it
using the & button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When
locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the
distance between the SmartKey and the corre-
sponding door handle must not be greater
than three feet (one meter).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when starting the engine
R
while driving
R
when the external door handles are touched
R
during convenience closing
X
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
face : or ;.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience
closing feature (Y page 85).
X
To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate han-
dle :.
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a
longer period of time, you can deactivate KEY-
LESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very lit-
tle power, thereby conserving battery power.
For the purposes of activation/deactivation,
the vehicle must not be nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on
the SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The indicator light on the SmartKey flashes
twice briefly then one long flash, then KEY-
LESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 72).
X
To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-
tures are available again.
70
SmartKey
Opening and closing
KEYLESS-GO start function
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
SmartKey in the vehicle.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-
quently travel on your own.
X
To change the setting: press and hold the
% and & buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 72).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock: press the % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
X
To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds until the
battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 72).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
(Y page 68).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X
To deactivate the alarm with the key:
press the % or & button on the key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-
tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehi-
cle.
or
X
Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehi-
cle.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
SmartKey
71
Opening and closing
Z
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
Unlocking the driver's door (Y page 76)
R
Unlocking the cargo compartment
(Y page 82)
R
Locking the vehicle (Y page 77)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub-
stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the battery replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 72).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 71).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the opening in
the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When
doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X
Remove battery tray cover :.
72
SmartKey
Opening and closing
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X
Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X
Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle using
the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try to lock/unlock the vehicle again using the SmartKey's remote
control function. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 72).
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try to lock/unlock the vehicle again using the SmartKey's remote
control function. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
73
Opening and closing
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 72).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 294).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 295).
or
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 72).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
74
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You have lost a Smart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
ing guidelines (Y page 250).
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
X
To unlock and open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and opens.
X
To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68).
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This can be useful if you wish
to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for
example.
Doors
75
Opening and closing
Z
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
are secured by the child-proof lock
(Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 68).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-
viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
R
the vehicle is being pushed
R
the vehicle is being towed
R
the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board com-
puter (Y page 199).
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
ical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 68).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 71).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
76
Doors
Opening and closing
X
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X
Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key.
X
Open the driver's door.
X
Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the tailgate.
X
Press the locking button on the driver’s door
(Y page 75).
X
Check whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors are
still visible. Press down the locking knobs by
hand, if necessary.
X
Close the driver's door.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 71).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as
it will go to position 1.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X
Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
X
Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
i
If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
theft alarm system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the close button or STOP button on
the tailgate.
R
pull the handle on the tailgate.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior
if the tailgate is open while the engine is
running, especially if the vehicle is in
motion. There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
Cargo compartment
77
Opening and closing
Z
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking
or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 339).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the load-
ing guidelines (Y page 250).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out.
The tailgate can be:
R
opened and closed manually from outside
R
vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate:
opened/closed automatically from the out-
side
R
vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate:
opened/closed automatically from the
inside
R
vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start
function: closed with the remote operating
switch on the SmartKey
R
released with the emergency release from
the inside
Tailgate obstruction detection with
reversing feature
On vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, the
tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle
recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when
automatically opening or closing, this proce-
dure is stopped. If the tailgate is stopped dur-
ing the closing process, the tailgate automati-
cally opens again slightly. The automatic
obstruction detection with reversing feature is
only an aid. It is not a substitute for your atten-
tiveness when opening and closing the tail-
gate.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey,
or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing button/STOP button in
the tailgate or
R
pull the handle on the tailgate
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is
also possible to stop the closing process by
performing a kicking movement under the rear
bumper.
Opening and closing manually
Opening
78
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
X
Pull handle :.
X
Lift the tailgate.
Closing
X
Pull the tailgate down using handle :.
X
Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
X
Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO.
Opening/closing automatically from
the outside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the close button or STOP button on
the tailgate.
R
pull the handle on the tailgate.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior
if the tailgate is open while the engine is
running, especially if the vehicle is in
motion. There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 339).
Opening automatically
You can open the tailgate automatically with
the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X
Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
or
X
If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle
and let it go again immediately.
Closing automatically
Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: you can
also close the tailgate automatically from out-
side.
Cargo compartment
79
Opening and closing
Z
X
To close: press button : on the tailgate.
or
X
Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-
tion: if the SmartKey is located in the imme-
diate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F
button on the SmartKey.
You can release the button as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
X
To stop the closing process: press but-
ton : on the tailgate again.
or
X
Pull the handle in the tailgate.
or
X
Press the F button on the SmartKey
until the tailgate stops.
or
X
Press or pull the remote operating switch on
the driver's door.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The vehicle exhaust system can become
very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system. There is a risk of injury.
Always ensure that you make the kicking
movement only within the detection range of
the sensors.
!
If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
tions, for example, could lead to the unin-
tentional opening of the tailgate:
R
when using an automatic car wash
R
when using a power washer
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.
i
You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur-
ther information on deactivating and activat-
ing KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70).
General notes
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the
procedure without using your hands. This is
useful if you have your hands full. To do this,
make a kicking movement under the bumper
with your foot.
Observe the following points:
R
Carry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
son. The SmartKey must be at the rear of
the vehicle in the detection range of KEY-
LESS-GO.
R
When making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
to the rear of the vehicle. You could other-
wise lose your balance, for example on ice.
R
Always ensure that you only make the kick-
ing movement within the detection range of
sensors :.
R
Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
R
Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Other-
wise, the sensors may not function cor-
rectly.
R
HANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function
during engine start.
R
Dirt caused by road salt or snow around
sensors : may restrict functionality.
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a
prosthetic leg may restrict functionality.
R
If a KEYLESS-GO key is at the rear of the
vehicle in the detection range of KEYLESS-
GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be trig-
80
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
gered. The tailgate could thus be opened or
closed unintentionally, for example, if you:
-
set something down or lift something up
behind the vehicle.
-
polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about
your person in these situations or in situa-
tions similar to these. This will prevent the
unintentional opening/closing of the tail-
gate.
Operation
X
To open/close: kick your foot into sensor
detection zone : below the bumper.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate
is opening or closing.
X
If the tailgate does not open/close after
several attempts: wait at least ten sec-
onds, using your foot kick under the bumper
again.
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the tailgate does not open or close.
Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this
occurs.
To stop the opening or closing procedure:
R
kick with your foot into sensor detection
range : under the bumper, or
R
pull the handle on the outside of the tail-
gate, or
R
press the closing button on the tailgate, or
R
press the F button on the SmartKey
If the tailgate closing procedure has been
stopped:
R
kick your foot under the bumper again and
the tailgate will open.
If the tailgate opening procedure has been
stopped:
R
kick your foot under the bumper again and
the tailgate will close.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
during automatic closing of the tailgate.
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
closing area during the closing process.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
R
pull the handle on the tailgate
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior
if the tailgate is open while the engine is
running, especially if the vehicle is in
motion. There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
Cargo compartment
81
Opening and closing
Z
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 339).
Opening and closing automatically
You can open the tailgate from the driver's
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
It is only possible to close the tailgate from the
driver's seat on vehicles with the EASY-PACK
tailgate.
X
To open: pull remote operating switch for
the tailgate : until the tailgate opens.
X
To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1
or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press and hold the remote operating switch
for tailgate : until the tailgate is com-
pletely closed.
Limiting the opening angle of the
tailgate
General notes
!
Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate. It is pos-
sible to limit the tailgate in the top half of its
opening range.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on
the outside of the tailgate again after it has
stopped automatically. This does not delete
the stored position.
Activating
X
To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate.
X
To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position:
R
press the closing button in the tailgate, or
R
pull the handle on the outside of the tail-
gate again, or
R
press the tailgate button on the SmartKey
X
To store the position: press and hold the
closing button on the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating
X
Press and hold the closing button on the
tailgate until two short tones sound.
Tailgate emergency release
General notes
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 339).
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
R
using the SmartKey, or
R
using the remote operating switch on the
door control panel
Use the emergency release inside the tailgate.
You can reach the emergency release via the
cargo compartment.
82
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
Opening
X
Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 254).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 71).
X
Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
the trim and push it in.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
Emergency release button
You can open the trunk lid from inside the
vehicle with the emergency release button.
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not open
the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side win-
dow moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or
press the switch to open the side window
again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they
are left unsupervised. There is a risk of
injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear
side windows. When leaving the vehicle,
always take the SmartKey with you and lock
the vehicle. Never leave children unsuper-
vised in the vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
Side windows
83
Opening and closing
Z
or restricts a side window from traveling
upwards during the automatic closing process,
the side window opens again automatically.
During the manual closing process, the side
window only opens again automatically after
the corresponding switch is released. The
automatic reversing feature is only an aid and
does not relieve you of the responsibility to
pay attention when closing a side window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
while adjusting
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the W
button to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Front left
;
Front right
=
Rear right
?
Rear left
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pull the corresponding switch again.
i
If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
i
You can continue to operate the side win-
dows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function remains
active for five minutes or until the driver's or
front-passenger door is opened.
i
When the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 59), the side win-
dows cannot be operated from the rear.
Convenience opening
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can ventilate the vehicle
before you start driving.
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out
the following functions simultaneously:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open the side windows
R
open the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblind
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey.
The "convenience opening" feature is also
available when the vehicle is unlocked.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO start function: the SmartKey
must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
84
Side windows
Opening and closing
X
Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama sunroof are
in the desired position.
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first.
X
Press and hold the % button once more
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel reaches the desired position.
X
To interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side win-
dow and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk
of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing proce-
dure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
start function: you can do the following at the
same time:
R
lock the vehicle
R
close the side windows
R
close the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblind.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
for:
R
The side window (Y page 83)
R
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel (Y page 88)
R
The roller sunblind (Y page 89)
Using the SmartKey
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: for the following opera-
tions, point the tip of the SmartKey at the
handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey
must be close to the driver's door handle.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: the SmartKey must be
in close proximity to the vehicle.
X
Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the panorama sliding sun-
roof are fully closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X
Press and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblind of the panorama sliding
sunroof closes.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the
handle is used, must both be closed. The
SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The
gap between the SmartKey and the corre-
sponding door handle should not be greater
than 3 ft (1 m).
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are fully closed.
i
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
Side windows
85
Opening and closing
Z
X
Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind of
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel closes.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door
handle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (Y page 84).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 84).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
X
If the respective side window remains
closed after the button is released, then it
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side win-
dow closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of
the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
86
Side windows
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
A side window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
A side window cannot
be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing fea-
ture.
The side windows can-
not be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 72).
Panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
G
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sun-
roof, body parts in close proximity could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing
procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
G
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they
are left unsupervised. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof
automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This
could trap you or other persons. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that nobody rea-
ches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The
sliding sunroof lifts during opening.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
87
Opening and closing
Z
!
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
!
The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be dam-
aged if water enters the vehicle interior.
i
Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or
open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the clos-
ing process, the sliding sunroof opens again
automatically. However, the automatic revers-
ing feature is only an aid and does not relieve
you of the responsibility of paying attention
when closing the sliding sunroof.
G
WARNING
The reverse function does not react in par-
ticular:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
path
R
while adjusting
R
when closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the button immediately, or
R
briefly push the button in any direction
during automatic closing.
The closing process is stopped.
G
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again imme-
diately after it has been blocked or reset,
the sliding sunroof closes with increased
force.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
closing area in the process. There is a risk of
injury or becoming trapped.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in
the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the button immediately, or
R
briefly push the button in any direction
during automatic closing.
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
:
To raise
;
To open
=
To close/lower
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel can only be operated when the roller
sunblind is open.
88
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller
sunblind closes slightly automatically. This
reduces drafts in the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it
lowers slightly automatically at higher speeds.
The noise level in the vehicle interior is
reduced as a result.
At low speeds it raises again automatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
sliding sunroof raises again automatically.
You can continue to operate the sliding sun-
roof after switching off the engine or removing
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This func-
tion remains active for five minutes or until
you open a front door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding
sunroof.
If contact is made with a roof carrier approved
by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raised at the rear.
Rain-closing feature
The rain-closing feature is only available for
vehicles with a rain sensor.
When the SmartKey is in position g in the
ignition lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof
closes automatically:
R
if it starts to rain.
R
at extreme outside temperatures.
R
after six hours.
R
if there is a malfunction in the power supply.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel remains raised at the rear in order to
allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is obstructed while being closed by the
rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly.
The rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel does not close if:
R
it is raised at the rear.
R
it is blocked.
R
no rain is falling on the area of the wind-
shield being monitored by the rain sensor. If
the vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or
in a carport, the field of the sensor may be
covered.
Operating the roller sunblind for the
panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
between the roller sunblind and frame or
sliding sunroof during automatic opening or
closing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be
opened and closed when the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the roller sunblind during the clos-
ing process, the roller sunblind opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing feature
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness when closing the roller sunblind.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
89
Opening and closing
Z
G
WARNING
The reverse function does not react in par-
ticular:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
when closing the roller sunblind again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move-
ment.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the button immediately, or
R
briefly push the button in any direction
during automatic closing.
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing
:
Opens
;
Opens
=
Closes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automati-
cally closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
vehicle interior.
Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel or the roller sunblind if the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind does not move smoothly.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow :
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel is fully closed.
X
Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X
Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow :
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X
Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X
Make sure that the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sun-
blind can be fully opened and closed again.
X
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above.
90
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
G
WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or a voltage drop, then the reversing
feature will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum
force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or a voltage drop.
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
cannot be closed and
you cannot see the
cause.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed dur-
ing closing and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to
the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with
more force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed
again during closing and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to
the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
The panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
cannot be opened or
closed using the conve-
nience opening/closing
feature.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 72).
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
91
Opening and closing
Z
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
R
you are as far away from the driver's air bag
as possible
R
you are sitting in a normal upright position
R
your thighs are slightly supported by the
seat cushion
R
your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly
R
the back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
R
you can move your legs freely
R
you can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
R
you should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
R
the seat belt is pulled snugly against the
body and is routed across the center of your
shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic
area
i Further related subjects:
R
Adjusting the seats manually
(Y page 94)
R
Adjusting the seats electrically
(Y page 94)
R
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 97)
R
Fastening the seat belt correctly
(Y page 43)
R
Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exte-
rior mirrors (Y page 98)
R
Vehicles with a memory function: sav-
ing the seat, steering wheel and exterior
mirror settings using the memory function
(Y page 101)
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
adjust the seats, particularly when unatten-
ded. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on
the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
When adjusting a seat, make sure that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of the
seat.
92
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move forwards as far as the next catch dur-
ing movement such as braking or abrupt
changes of direction. As a result, you would
be pushed against your seat belt by the
unsecured driver's seat.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle. The seat belt cannot protect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Before every journey, make sure that the
driver's seat is fully engaged.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(Y page 44) and "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 53).
G
WARNING
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
motion. This could cause you to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is
engaged before starting the vehicle.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured. Children in particular
could accidentally press the electrical seat
adjustment buttons and become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
system.
!
To prevent damage to the seats and the
seat heating, observe the following notes:
R
Do not spill liquids onto the seats. Dry the
seats as soon as possible if liquid does
get spilled on the seats.
R
If the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. Also, do not
use the seat heating to dry the seats.
R
Clean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
R
Do not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place pointed objects on
the seat cushions such as knives, nails or
tools. Where possible, use the seats only
for carrying passengers.
R
When operating the seat heating, do not
cover the seats with insulating materials,
e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
R
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as a result
of objects being placed on the seats, for
example, seat cushions, child seats and
protective covers not approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
moving the seats back. There is a risk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i Further related subjects:
R
Cargo compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear seats) (Y page 253)
Seats
93
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Adjusting the seats manually
Vehicles without the seating comfort
package
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
X
Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
backwards.
X
Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle:
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X
Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
Seat height:
X
Pull handle ; upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Vehicles with the seating comfort
package
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
X
Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
rearwards.
X
Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle:
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X
Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards.
Seat height:
X
Pull handle ? upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Seat cushion angle:
X
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are
lightly supported.
X
Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
Seat cushion length:
X
Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the
seat cushion forwards or backwards.
X
Release lever ; again.
The seat cushion engages.
Adjusting the seats electrically
:
Seat height
;
Seat cushion angle
=
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
?
Backrest angle
i
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 101).
94
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible
to your head.
General notes
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot
adjust the front head restraints or the outer
rear head restraints.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head.
X
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
There are several notches.
X
To move backwards: press and hold
release button : and push the head
restraint backwards.
X
When the head restraint is in the desired
position, release the button and make sure
that the head restraint is engaged in posi-
tion.
Seats
95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
:
Raises the backrest contour
;
Softens the backrest contour
=
Lowers the backrest contour
?
Hardens the backrest contour
AMG Performance Seat
Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats:
to adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat
cushion
X
To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion narrower: press button :.
X
To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion wider: press button ;.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
X
To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest narrower: press button =.
X
To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest wider: press button ?.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating
can cause the seat cushion and backrest
pads to become very hot. The health of per-
sons with limited temperature sensitivity or
a limited ability to react to high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suf-
fer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
!
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as a result of
objects being placed on the seats, for exam-
ple, seat cushions, child seats and protec-
tive covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that there are no objects on the seat
surface when the seat heating is switched
on.
96
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prema-
turely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Adjusting the steering wheel
G
WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Steering wheel
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
:
Release lever
;
Adjusts the steering wheel height
=
Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
X
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
X
Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X
Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
Mirrors
Inside rearview mirror
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;.
Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press
button :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
98
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
exterior mirror using button = as long as
the indicator lamp is lit.
X
Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mir-
ror to the correct position. You should have
a good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated at low out-
side temperatures. Heating takes a maximum
of ten minutes.
i
You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
This function is only available in Canada.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i
If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
This function is only available in Canada.
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors
when locking" function in the on-board com-
puter (Y page 200).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Briefly press :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in Canada.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 200):
R
the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
R
the exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
i
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X
Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors (Canada only): press and hold
mirror-folding button (Y page 99) until you
hear a click and the mirror engages audibly
into position.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 98).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The elec-
trolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It
must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be
swallowed. There is a risk of injury.
Mirrors
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
If you come into contact with the electro-
lyte, observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-
ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do
not induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
only available if the vehicle is equipped with
the "Mirrors package".
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
ing is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking posi-
tion
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
You can store this position.
:
Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
;
Button for the front-passenger side exte-
rior mirror
=
Button for the exterior mirror setting
?
Memory button M
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine (Y page 125).
X
Press button ;.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default parking position.
X
Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror
to a position that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another
position, the front-passenger side exterior
mirror returns to the driving position.
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mir-
ror using the corresponding button
(Y page 98).
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
R
about ten seconds after you have disen-
gaged reverse gear
R
when you use button : to select the exte-
rior mirror on the driver's side
100
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Memory function
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driv-
er's side while driving, you could lose con-
trol of the vehicle as a result of the adjust-
ments being made. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Only use the memory function on the driv-
er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particu-
larly children – could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
becomes trapped, immediately release the
memory function position button. The
adjustment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
R
Seat and backrest position
R
Driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 94).
X
Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
side (Y page 98).
X
Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.
i
The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Memory function
101
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun-
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due to
legal requirements and self-imposed obliga-
tions.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
R
light switch
R
combination switch (Y page 104)
R
on-board computer (Y page 199)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-hand standing lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
C N
Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog
lamps)
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to the à position.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position g
Automatic headlamp mode
à is the preferred light switch position:
R
The light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to
weather conditions such as fog, snow or
spray).
R
With the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
tion lock: the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
R
With the engine running: if you have activa-
ted the Daytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights function
via the on-board computer, the daytime run-
ning lamps or the parking lamps and the
low-beam headlamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
X
To switch on the automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to the Ã
position.
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
low-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or
other causes of poor visibility due to the
weather conditions such as spray. There is a
risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicle during the day. The daytime
running lamps function is required by law in
Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you shift the automatic transmis-
sion from a driving position to position j the
102
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
daytime running lamps or low-beam head-
lamps go out after 3 minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn
the light switch to the T position, the day-
time running lamps and parking lamps turn on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the L position, the manual set-
tings take precedence over the daytime run-
ning lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
the daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 199).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the T or L position, the man-
ual settings take precedence over the daytime
running lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched
on and the light switch is set to the L posi-
tion. This is a particularly useful function in the
event of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Front fog lamps
In conditions where visibility is poor due to
fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve visi-
bility as well as making it easier for other road
users to see you. They can be operated
together with the parking lamps or together
with the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps.
X
To switch on the fog lamps: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the fog lamps: press the
N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-spe-
cific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery charge is very low, the park-
ing lamps or standing lamps are automati-
cally switched off to enable the next engine
start. Always park your vehicle safely and in
a well lit area, in accordance with the rele-
vant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T
parking lamps over a period of several
hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand
X or left-hand W standing lamps.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position g in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Exterior lighting
103
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Combination switch
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
the à position if the low-beam head-
lamps are on.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its
normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
X
To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the correspond-
ing side of the vehicle will flash.
X
To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-
cation.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
104
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of
the headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:
p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on or off
;
c Switches the front interior lighting on
=
v Switches the rear interior lighting on
or off
?
| Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A
p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on or off
B
Switches the automatic interior lighting
control on
Rear compartment control panel
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
:
p Switches the reading lamp on or off
Vehicles without a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
:
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
;
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient light-
ing are set via the multimedia system (see Dig-
ital Operator's Manual).
Interior lighting
105
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on: set the switch to center posi-
tion B.
X
To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on
if you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open a door
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for a set
time when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can set this delayed switch-
off via the multimedia system (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very
hot when operating. If you change a bulb,
you could burn yourself on these compo-
nents. There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down
before changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
R
you touch it
R
it is hot
R
you drop it
R
you scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 106).
Have the bulbs that you cannot change your-
self replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect
of vehicle safety. You must therefore make
sure that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped
with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your-
self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
Overview of bulb types
You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Vehicles with halogen headlamps
:
Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
;
High-beam headlamps/daytime running
lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W
=
Low-beam headlamps: H15 55 W
106
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
:
Backup lamp: W 16 W
;
Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
=
Brake lamp: W 16 W
?
Rear fog lamp: H 21 W
Replacing front bulbs
Removing and installing the cover in
the front wheel housing
You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X
To remove: switch off the lights.
X
Turn the front wheels inwards.
X
Slide cover : up and remove it.
X
To install: insert cover : again and slide it
down until it engages.
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-
lamps)
X
Remove the cover in the front wheel hous-
ing (Y page 107).
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X
Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X
Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 107).
High-beam headlamps/daytime run-
ning lamps/parking lamps and stand-
ing lamps (halogen headlamps)
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
Replacing bulbs
107
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
X
Insert the new bulb and engage it to the
stop.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
out of bulb holder :.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X
Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Replacing rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
Left-hand side trim panel
You must open the side trim panel in the cargo
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
X
To open: turn release knob : counter-
clockwise and remove side trim panel ;.
X
To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : clockwise.
Right-hand side trim panel
You must open the side trim panel in the cargo
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
X
To open: release right-hand trim panel : at
the top and fold it down in the direction of
the arrow.
X
To close: replace side paneling :.
Tail lamps
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp (vehicles with halogen head-
lamps) and rear fog lamp in the tailgate
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Open the cargo compartment.
X
Open the side trim panel (Y page 108).
X
Release and remove connector ;.
X
Hold the tail lamp and unscrew fender
nut :.
X
Remove the tail lamp.
108
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
Tail lamps
X
Loosen screws = using a screwdriver.
X
Remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
Bulb holder
?
Turn signals
A
Brake lamp
X
Turn signal: press the bulb gently into the
bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
X
Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
turn it clockwise.
X
Brake lamp: remove the corresponding
bulb from the bulb holder.
X
Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X
Insert the bulb holder into the tail lamp and
screw it firmly into place using screws =.
X
Insert the tail lamp into the vehicle.
X
Tighten fender nut : and re-establish con-
tact with connector ;.
X
Close the side trim panel (Y page 108).
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
Combination switch
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
!
Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-
shield becomes dirty in dry weather condi-
tions, the windshield wipers may be activa-
ted inadvertently. This could then damage
Windshield wipers
109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or
Å position, the appropriate wiping fre-
quency is automatically set according to the
intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the
rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä
position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe
more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Switching the rear window wiper
on/off
Combination switch
:
è Switch
2
ô Wipes with washer fluid
3
I Switches on intermittent wiping
4
0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5
ô Wipes with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Slide switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the è symbol appears in the assistance
graphic in the instrument cluster. Further
information on the assistance graphic
(Y page 197).
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you
could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is
a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of
the wiper.
!
Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO start function: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.
110
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand.
With the other hand, turn wiper blade in
direction of arrow : away from the wiper
arm as far as it will go.
X
Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the removal position with
a noticeable click.
X
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper
arm in the direction of arrow :.
X
Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
until it engages in the locking position with a
noticeable click.
X
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated
correctly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
X
Remove protective film : of the service
indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes
from black to yellow, the wiper blades should
be replaced.
i
The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Windshield wipers
111
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Changing the rear window wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GO start function: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X
Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear win-
dow.
X
Press both release clips ;.
X
Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X
Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Installing a wiper blade
X
Position new wiper blade : with recess B
on lug A.
X
Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X
Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
dow.
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray noz-
zles no longer hits the
center of the wind-
shield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X
Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
112
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise
fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto-
matic climate control regulates the tempera-
ture and the humidity of the vehicle interior
and filters undesirable substances from the
air.
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto-
matic climate control can only be operated
when the engine is running. Optimum opera-
tion is only achieved with the side windows
and panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is
reactivated (Y page 84).
The residual heat function can only be activa-
ted or deactivated with the ignition switched
off (Y page 122).
Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment
clear (Y page 108). Otherwise the vehicle will
not be ventilated correctly.
i
Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period dur-
ing warm weather, e.g. using the conveni-
ence opening feature (Y page 84). This will
speed up the cooling process and the
desired interior temperature will be reached
more quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollu-
tants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle inte-
rior. For this reason, you should always
observe the interval for replacing the filter,
which is specified in the Maintenance Book-
let. As it depends on environmental condi-
tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval
may be shorter than stated in the Mainte-
nance Booklet.
i
It is possible that under certain circum-
stances the residual heat function may be
activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed in order to dry
the automatic climate control. The vehicle is
then ventilated for 30 minutes.
Overview of climate control systems
113
Climate control
Air-conditioning system control panel
USA only
:
Sets the temperature (Y page 119)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
=
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
?
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
A
Sets the airflow (Y page 120)
B
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)
Canada only
:
Sets the temperature (Y page 119)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
=
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
?
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
A
Sets the airflow (Y page 120)
114
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
B
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
C
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)
Notes on using the air-conditioning
system
Air-conditioning system
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use the air-con-
ditioning system optimally.
R
Switch on the air-conditioning system by
turning control knob A clockwise to the
desired position (except position 0).
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
R
Recommendation for avoiding misted
windows at low exterior temperatures
or in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with
dehumidification function (Y page 118).
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible
switch off P and O (Y page 120).
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e
(Y page 122).
Set airflow control A to a setting between
3 and 6 (Y page 120).
R
Recommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
airflow control A to a setting between 3
and 6 (Y page 120).
R
Recommendation for a constant vehicle
interior temperature: set airflow control
A to a setting between 1 and 3
(Y page 120).
R
Recommendation for air distribution in
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(Y page 120).
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: select the P or P and ¯
settings (Y page 120).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could other-
wise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
R
If you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen on the multimedia
system display; see Digital Operator's Man-
ual. You will see the current settings of the
various climate control functions.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between various drive pro-
grams with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(Y page 132).
If you have selected drive program E:
R
when heating, the electrical heater booster
is deactivated and in the warming-up phase
heat output is reduced
R
the rear window defroster running time is
reduced
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
gram I.
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli-
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 130).
Overview of climate control systems
115
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
USA only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 119)
;
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 119)
=
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
?
Increases the airflow (Y page 120)
A
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
B
Display
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
D
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 118)
E
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 119)
F
Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 121)
G
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
H
Reduces the airflow (Y page 120)
I
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)
J
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 120)
116
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Canada only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 119)
;
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 119)
=
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 120)
?
Increases the airflow (Y page 120)
A
Sets the air distribution (Y page 120)
B
Display
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 122)
D
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 118)
E
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 119)
F
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 122)
G
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 118)
H
Reduces the airflow (Y page 120)
I
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 122)
J
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 120)
Optimum use of dual-zone automatic
climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructions and recom-
mendations to enable you to get the most out
of your dual-zone automatic climate control.
R
Activate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could other-
wise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
lamp in the á button goes out.
R
Use the residual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deac-
tivated with the ignition switched off.
R
If you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen on the multimedia
system display; see Digital Operator's Man-
Overview of climate control systems
117
Climate control
ual. You will see the current settings of the
various climate control functions.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between various drive pro-
grams with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(Y page 132).
If you have selected drive program E:
R
when heating, the electrical heater booster
is deactivated and in the warming-up phase
heat output is reduced
R
the rear window defroster running time is
reduced
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
gram I.
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli-
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-
mate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 130).
Operating the climate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also switched
off. The windows could fog up. Therefore,
switch off climate control only briefly
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
the desired position (except position 0)
(Y page 114).
X
To switch off: turn control A counter-
clockwise to position 0 (Y page 114).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X
To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
i
Dual-zone automatic climate control:
switch on climate control primarily using the
à button.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehicle
will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle
will also not be dehumidified. The windows can
fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate
the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" func-
tion briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run-
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
tion.
Activating/deactivating
X
Press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates
that the respective function is activated. The
"Cooling with air dehumidification" function
has a delayed switch-off feature.
118
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button flashes
three times or remains
off. The "Cooling with
air dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
The automatic climate control function is only
available in conjunction with dual-zone auto-
matic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is activated automatically in automatic
mode.
Setting climate control to automatic
X
Turn the SmartKey to position ; in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X
To switch to manual mode: press the
É or Ë button.
or
X
Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are deactivated.
Setting the temperature
Air-conditioning system
You can set the temperature for the entire
vehicle. The set temperature is automatically
maintained at a constant level.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control :
counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 114). Only change the temperature
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides. The set tem-
perature is automatically maintained at a con-
stant level.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To increase or decrease: turn control :
or E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 116). Only change the temperature
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Operating the climate control systems
119
Climate control
Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
Air distribution settings
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
P
Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air
vents
i
You can also activate several air distribu-
tion settings simultaneously. To do this,
press multiple air distribution buttons. The
air is then directed through various vents.
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise
until they engage.
Setting the air distribution
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
P
Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S
Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
b
Directs air through the defroster, center
and side air vents
a
Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directs air through the defroster, cen-
ter, side and footwell vents
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise
until they engage.
Setting the air distribution
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the dis-
play.
Setting the airflow
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control A
counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 114).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To increase or reduce: press the K or
I button.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
X
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
X
To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is adopted for the front-passenger side.
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield and
side windows.
120
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
i
You should only select the "Windshield
defrosting" function until the windshield is
clear again.
Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
i
The "Windshield defrosting" function auto-
matically sets the blower level to the opti-
mum defrosting effect. As a result, the air-
flow may increase or decrease automatically
after the ¬ button is pressed.
i
You can adjust the blower level manually
while the "Windshield defrosting" function is
in operation:
R
Air-conditioning system: turn airflow con-
trol A counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 114).
R
Dual-zone automatic climate control:
press the ó or ô button.
X
To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X
Dual-zone climate control: press the Ã
button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Air-conditioning system: turn temperature
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 114).
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
temperature control : or E counter-clock-
wise or clockwise (Y page 116).
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Removing condensation from the
windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Air-conditioning system
X
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function.
X
Activate automatic mode Ã.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Set the air distribution to P or O.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Operating the climate control systems
121
Climate control
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in particular
at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-
recirculation mode is activated automatically:
R
at high outside temperatures
R
at high levels of pollution
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
matically, the indicator lamp in the e but-
ton is not lit. Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at out-
side temperatures below approximately
45 ‡ (7 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if the
"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 45 ‡
(7 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidifica-
tion" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
climate control.
122
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the set interior temperature.
i
The blower will run at a low speed regard-
less of the airflow setting.
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will
be activated. The blower runs at medium
speed.
i
You cannot use the ventilation to cool the
vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
the outside temperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (Y page 125).
X
Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates
that the respective function is activated.
i Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
air vents. This could result in burns or frost-
bite in the immediate vicinity of the air
vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i
For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
3
Side air vent open
4
Side air vent closed
X
To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; to the left in position 3.
X
To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will
go to position 4.
i
The center and rear air vents are adjusted
in the same way.
Air vents
123
Climate control
Z
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehi-
cle has been delivered or after repairs. Full
system effectiveness is not reached until the
end of this teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
R
You should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
R
Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-
tle, during this period.
R
Change gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red
area of the tachometer.
R
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
R
Try to avoid depressing the accelerator
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-
down).
R
Ideally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
drive in program E.
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-
AMG vehicles:
R
Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
R
Only allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
R
Change gear in good time.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can
increase the engine speed gradually and bring
the vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing-in if the engine or parts of the drive train
on your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict
the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed
pedal. The operating and road safety of the
vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an
accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not
use loose floormats and do not place floor-
mats on top of one another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct
usage of the pedals, e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could
affect, for example, the power steering and
the brake boosting effect. You will require
considerably more effort to steer and brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake
can:
R
overheat and cause a fire
R
lose its hold function.
124
Driving
Driving and parking
There is a risk of fire and an accident.
Release the parking brake fully before driv-
ing off.
!
Do not warm up the engine while station-
ary. Pull away immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and full throttle until the
engine has reached its operating tempera-
ture.
In vehicles with automatic transmission,
engage positions P and R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load
operation and engine speeds greater than
5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This
helps to protect the engine and avoids
uncomfortable driving.
Key positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position j)
1
Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey
for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched
on. The engine cannot be started.
Start/Stop button
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
ton.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
imately two seconds recognition time. You can
then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is
only the case if you are not depressing the
brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-
GO.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will no longer be able to start the engine
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle
is unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-
ton on the front door (Y page 75), you can
continue to start the engine with the Start/
Stop button.
Driving
125
Driving and parking
Z
The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off func-
tion.
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
For further information on situations in which
an indicator lamp either fails to go out after
the engine is started or lights up while driving,
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster" (Y page 232).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this is the same as the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when
in this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position, the ignition is
switched off again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-
mal using the SmartKey.
You can only switch between Start/Stop but-
ton mode and SmartKey operation when the
vehicle is stationary.
You must also engage park position j.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
126
Driving
Driving and parking
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system
or parts of the engine that heat up. There is
a risk of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
General notes
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 134).
The transmission position indicator on the
multifunction display shows j
(Y page 134).
i
You can start the engine in transmission
positions j and i.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125) and release it as
soon as the engine is running.
Starting procedure with the Start/
Stop button
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehicle manually without inserting the Smart-
Key into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop but-
ton must be inserted in the ignition lock and
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This
mode for starting the engine operates inde-
pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
engine start function.
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is
in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and
always take the SmartKey with you when leav-
ing the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a
short time. Pay attention to the important
safety notes.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 125).
The engine starts.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 126).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case,
the previously selected climate control setting
is activated. In this way you can cool or heat
the interior of the vehicle before starting the
journey.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it
is safe to start and run the engine where your
vehicle is parked.
Observe the legal stipulations in the area
where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via
smartphone may be limited to certain coun-
tries or regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecu-
tive starting attempts via your smartphone. If
you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock,
you can carry out two more starting attempts.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at
any time.
You can only start the engine via your smart-
phone if:
R
the SmartKey is in the ignition lock
R
park position j is selected
R
the accelerator pedal is not depressed
R
the alarm for the anti-theft alarm system is
not set
R
the panic alarm is not activated
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched off
R
the hood is closed
Driving
127
Driving and parking
Z
R
the doors are closed and locked
R
the windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
R
the fuel tank is sufficiently filled
R
the starter battery has been sufficiently
charged
G
WARNING
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
nance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone before carrying out main-
tenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you:
R
switch on the hazard warning lamps
R
do not lock the doors
R
open the hood
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position 7
or C, the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position 7
or C, always firmly depress the brake
pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (Y page 199).
Vehicles with automatic transmission: it is
possible to shift the transmission from posi-
tion j to the desired position only if you
depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved
but the parking lock remains engaged.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not
depress the brake pedal, the selector lever can
still be moved but the parking lock remains
engaged.
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of position j
into another transmission position when the
engine is running.
i
Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the cat-
alytic converter to reach its operating tem-
perature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (Y page 148).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
R
the transmission is in position i.
R
the electric parking brake is applied.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Further information on holding the vehicle sta-
tionary on uphill gradients (Y page 138).
128
Driving
Driving and parking
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-
ped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of
your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically
and you exit the vehicle, the engine is
restarted automatically. The vehicle may
begin moving. There is a risk of accident and
injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn
off the ignition and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you start the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
play.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is available only in drive program r.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the
transmission in position h or i, the ECO
start/stop function will switch off the engine
automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green
R
the off-road program is deactivated
R
the outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system
R
the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture
R
the set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached
R
the battery is sufficiently charged
R
the system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning sys-
tem is switched on
R
the hood is closed
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened
All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically. It
is then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop,
then three subsequent stops).
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
R
in transmission position h or i, the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is
not active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear k
R
you move the transmission out of position
j
R
you activate the off-road program
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
Driving
129
Driving and parking
Z
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the condition of charge of the battery is too
low
Shifting the transmission to position j does
not start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automatically when
the vehicle stops.
AMG Performance exhaust system
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between different AMG Per-
formance exhaust system volumes using the
position of the exhaust flap.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-
ting is activated.
Setting the volume:
X
Press button :.
If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp ; lights up.
130
Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine does not
start.
The HOLD function or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 166) or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 163).
X
Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the SmartKey back to position g in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again. Avoid excessively long and frequent
attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 295).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
131
Driving and parking
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine is not run-
ning smoothly and is
misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant tempera-
ture gauge shows a
value above 248 ‡
(120 †). The warning
lamp may also be on
and a warning tone may
sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is
no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 276). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Notes on towing vehicles
The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow
bar systems, such as those used for flat tow-
ing or dinghy towing.
Attaching or using tow bar systems may result
in damage to the vehicle.
When towing a vehicle with tow bar systems,
safe driving characteristics cannot be guaran-
teed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehi-
cle.
The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve.
Observe the permissible towing methods
(Y page 300) and the notes on towing with
both axles on the ground (Y page 300).
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the sound of the exhaust system (vehicles
with sports exhaust system)
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop func-
tion
R
the climate control
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C
is activated. For further information about
starting the engine, see (Y page 126).
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds, the
display goes out and the status symbol of
the selected drive program appears.
In addition, the current drive program set-
tings are displayed briefly in the multimedia
system display.
i
In a few countries, the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated at the factory due to
the available fuel grade. In this case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available in
any drive program, regardless of the display
in the multimedia system display.
132
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Driving and parking
Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
I Individual Individual settings
Off-road
Optimal driving character-
istics for easily negotiable
off-road terrain
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 138).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further
information on the manual drive program
(Y page 140).
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to
change the drive program. Depending on the
drive program selected the following vehicle
characteristics will change:
R
the drive
R
the transmission management
R
ESP
®
R
the suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
sport suspension system)
R
the sound of the exhaust system
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop func-
tion
R
the availability of gliding mode
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C
is activated. For further information about
starting the engine, see (Y page 126).
X
Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as
many times as necessary until the desired
drive program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the symbol of the
selected drive program appears.
The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : lights up in red.
Available drive programs:
I Individual Individual settings
C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-
mum-economy engine and
transmission settings
S Sport Sporty engine and trans-
mission settings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-
mission settings
Race
Maximum sportiness and
engine and transmission
settings suitable for the
racetrack
Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 138).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further
information on the manual drive program
(Y page 140).
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
133
Driving and parking
Z
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position 7
or C, the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position 7
or C, always firmly depress the brake
pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right
of the steering column.
For information on the selector lever in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 136).
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission
position j, k, i or h is shown in the
transmission position display in the multifunc-
tion display (Y page 134).
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position display
;
Gear
=
Drive program display
The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission posi-
tions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT
lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should
pull away carefully to check whether the
desired transmission position is engaged. Ide-
ally, you should select transmission position
h and drive program E or S.
Engaging park position P
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-
cle is coasting, do not shift the automatic
transmission directly from h to k, from
k to h or directly to j. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission may be damaged.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Transmission position display j is shown
in the multifunction display.
When you have engaged park position j,
make sure that the transmission position dis-
play shows j in the multifunction display.
You can engage park position j only when
the vehicle is stationary; do not switch directly
to park position j at high engine speed.
134
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down disengages the park-
ing lock. The transmission is in neutral i.
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park position
j into another transmission position when
the engine is running.
In order to shift from park position j directly
into k or h:
R
depress the brake pedal and
R
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance
Engaging park position P automati-
cally
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key or using the Start/Stop button and
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
R
you open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low
speed and the transmission is in position h
or k
In certain situations, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts automatically to transmission posi-
tion j if the HOLD function or Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe
the information on the HOLD function
(Y page 166) and on Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 162).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-
mation on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page 129).
Shifting to neutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
X
If the transmission is in position h or k:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position j:
depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first
point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to j automati-
cally.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
matically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
X
Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Automatic transmission
135
Driving and parking
Z
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Engage neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
X
If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position j:
depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position display
;
Drive program display
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should
pull away carefully to check whether the
desired transmission position is engaged. Ide-
ally, you should select transmission position
h and drive program C or S.
Engaging park position P
X
When the vehicle is stationary, press but-
ton :.
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X
Push the selector lever forwards past the
first point of resistance.
136
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Transmission positions
B
Park position
This prevents the vehicle from roll-
ing away when stopped.
Only shift the transmission to posi-
tion j when the vehicle is station-
ary. The parking lock should not be
used as a brake when parking.
Always apply the electronic parking
brake in addition to the parking lock
in order to secure the vehicle.
In the event of a malfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position j. Have
the vehicle electronics checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Park position j is automatically
engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using
the SmartKey and remove the
SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using
the SmartKey or using the Start/
Stop button and open the driver's
door or front-passenger door
R
you open the driver's door when
the vehicle is stationary or when
driving at a very low speed and
the transmission is in position h
or k
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position k when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to i
while driving. The automatic trans-
mission could otherwise be dam-
aged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if
the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position k or h,
the automatic transmission shifts to
i automatically.
!
Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts through the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position h. This automatic gear
shifting behavior is determined by:
R
the selected drive program
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
R
the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle: early upshifts
R
more throttle: late upshifts
Automatic transmission
137
Driving and parking
Z
Holding the vehicle stationary on
uphill gradients
G
WARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
agement system is automatically deactiva-
ted. This interrupts the power transmission.
The vehicle may, for example, roll back-
wards on gradients. There is a risk of an
accident.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehi-
cle stationary on uphill gradients by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch over-
heats, a warning tone sounds.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
Leave Engine RunningLeave Engine Running display message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
only be able to continue your journey once the
clutch has cooled down and the display mes-
sage in the multifunction display has disap-
peared.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. OilTrans. Oil
Overheated Drive on with Care
Overheated Drive on with Care display
message appears in the multifunction display.
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary
on uphill gradients by:
R
depressing the brake pedal
R
activating the HOLD function
R
engaging the electric parking brake
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible
to use kickdown in the automatic drive pro-
gram and the temporary manual drive program
M. When manual drive program M is perma-
nently activated, kickdown is not possible.
For further information on kickdown in manual
drive program M (Y page 142).
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting back and forth between transmission
positions h and k can help to free up the
vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The
vehicle's engine management system limits
the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)
when shifting back and forth. To shift repeat-
edly between transmission positions h and
k, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and
down past the point of resistance.
Drive programs
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
sporty engine settings.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the steering
138
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop func-
tion
R
the climate control
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
i
To permanently select the gears in drive
program I using the steering wheel paddle
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for
the drive.
Offroad drive program
The Off-road drive program is characterized
by the following:
R
the vehicle exhibits optimal driving charac-
teristics on easily negotiable off-road ter-
rain.
Drive program E (Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
comfort-oriented engine settings.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin.
R
gliding mode is activated automatically
when engine-internal conditions are fulfilled
and the accelerator is not depressed. At the
same time the transmission’s clutch opens
and the vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic
energy. As a result great distances can be
completed without the engine brake and
fuel consumption reduced.
i The availability of gliding mode depends on
various factors, including the following:
R
the engine and transmission temperature
R
the downhill gradient
R
the vehicle speed
R
performing regular adaptation functions
When you depress the brake pedal, gliding
mode is deactivated, depending on pedal
pressure.
When you activate cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, gliding mode is
not available.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of
the drive program can be selected:
R
the drive (engine management)
R
the transmission management
R
the suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
sport suspension system)
R
ESP
®
Information about configuring drive program I
with the multimedia system can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Drive program C (Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehicle pulls away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle has improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
R
gliding mode is available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is available.
Drive program S (Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits stiff springing and
damping settings (vehicles with AIR adaptive
sport suspension system).
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
Automatic transmission
139
Driving and parking
Z
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driv-
ing characteristics.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
R
the fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles
with AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem).
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG
adaptive sport suspension system)
i
The RACE drive program may not be used
on normal roads. RACE must only be activa-
ted and used on dedicated race circuits, not
on public roads.
The RACE drive program is characterized by
the following:
R
the vehicle exhibits driving characteristics
suitable for the racetrack.
R
all vehicle systems are set for maximum
sportiness.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
R
the fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings.
R
gliding mode is not available.
R
the ECO start/stop function is not available.
Manual gearshifting
General notes
You can change gear yourself using the steer-
ing wheel paddle shifters. The transmission
must be in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-
ing, you have two options:
R
temporary setting
R
permanent setting
If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
function display will show the current gear
instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
will be selected automatically.
Temporary setting
X
To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever
to position h.
X
Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
Temporary setting will be active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
the case of lateral acceleration, during an
overrun phase or when driving on steep ter-
rain.
X
To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to
change the drive program.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller to change the drive pro-
gram.
140
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
or
X
If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
gram I: shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller.
Shifting gears
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine
limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is
cut to prevent the engine from overrevving.
Always make sure that the engine speed
does not reach the red area of the tachome-
ter. There is otherwise a risk of engine dam-
age.
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine dam-
age by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunction display.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
!
In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the cur-
rent gear is reached. When the engine limit-
ing speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut
to prevent the engine from overrevving.
Always make sure that the engine speed
does not reach the red area of the tachome-
ter. There is otherwise a risk of engine dam-
age.
Automatic transmission
141
Driving and parking
Z
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X
Shift to recommended gear : when mes-
sage ; is shown in the multifunction dis-
play.
Kickdown
X
For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible
to use kickdown in temporary manual drive
program M. When manual drive program M is
permanently activated, kickdown is not possi-
ble.
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer shifts into all of
the gears.
Reverse gear can no
longer be engaged.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position h.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off
the auxiliary heating.
142
Refueling
Driving and parking
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is a risk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
away from fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic charging can lead to the crea-
tion of sparks and ignite fuel vapor. There is
a risk of fire and explosion.
Touch the metallic body of the vehicle
before you open the fuel filler cap or handle
the pump nozzle. Any possible electrostatic
charge present will in this way be depleted.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong
fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel
system. Even small amounts of the wrong
fuel could result in damage to the fuel sys-
tem and the engine. Notify a qualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel
can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection
system could otherwise be blocked by parti-
cles from the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 334).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(Y page 142).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automat-
ically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on
the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
cle.
On the inside of the fuel filler cap, you will find
information on the recommended fuel.
Refueling
143
Driving and parking
Z
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
Tire pressure table
=
To insert the fuel filler cap
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-
eled
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on
the inside of fuel filler flap =.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i
Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel
may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,
the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A
message appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 218).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 238).
For further information on warning and indica-
tor lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(Y page 238).
144
Refueling
Driving and parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G
WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same
as the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap can-
not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 69).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system or
exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care
not to park on dry grassland or harvested
grain fields.
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its
drivetrain could be damaged.
Parking
145
Driving and parking
Z
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position j and
the transmission position display must show
j in the multifunction display.
R
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
R
on uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
Automatic transmission
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): shift the transmission to position j.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :.
X
With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
position g in the ignition lock and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With the Start/Stop button: press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 125).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
If the driver's door is closed, this is the
same as key position 1. If the driver's door
is open, this is the same as key position g,
i.e. the SmartKey having been removed.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to j automati-
cally.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
matically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the
vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with
a towing system:
X
Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Engage neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
146
Parking
Driving and parking
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is a malfunction
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
the released parking brake.
X
If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
ing away.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs a function
test at regular intervals while the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurring are normal.
Applying or releasing manually
X
To apply: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
R
if the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 125) or
R
if the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically
applied when the transmission is in position
j and:
R
the engine is switched off or
R
the driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To prevent the electric parking brake from
being automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brake is also applied auto-
matically if:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brings
the vehicle to a standstill or
R
The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary
R
Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary
In addition, at least one of the following condi-
tions must be fulfilled:
R
The engine is switched off
R
The driver is not wearing a seat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
There is a system malfunction
R
The power supply is insufficient
R
The vehicle is stationary for a long period of
time
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
Parking
147
Driving and parking
Z
The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the engine is switched off by the
ECO start/stop function.
Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
matically released if all of the following condi-
tions are met:
R
The engine is running
R
The transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or shift
from position j to h or k
R
The seat belt is fastened
If the transmission is in position k, the tail-
gate must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
R
The driver's door is closed.
R
You are shifting from transmission position
j or have previously driven at speeds
greater than 2 mph (3 km/h)
Ensure that you do not depress the accelera-
tor pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the park-
ing brake will be released and the vehicle will
start to move.
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
emergency by using the electric parking brake.
X
While driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 147).
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
handle : of the electric parking brake
pressed. The longer the electric parking
brake handle : is depressed, the greater
the braking force.
During braking:
R
a warning tone sounds
R
the Release Parking Brake
Release Parking Brake message
appears
R
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is applied.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could
affect, for example, the power steering and
the brake boosting effect. You will require
considerably more effort to steer and brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions
prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone
while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
148
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per
second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
R
The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
R
Remove unnecessary loads.
R
Remove roof racks when they are not nee-
ded.
R
Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
R
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
R
Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service inter-
val display.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving
in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly
terrain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident is greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Emission control
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display shows you how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists
you in achieving the most economical driving
style for the selected settings and prevailing
conditions. Your driving style can significantly
influence the vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start
Bonus fr. Start
and represents the additional range achieved
since the beginning of the journey as a result
of an adapted driving style.
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve
range, the Fuel LowFuel Low message is shown in the
multifunction display instead of range ?. The
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 238).
Driving tips
149
Driving and parking
Z
The ECO display consists of three sections,
with an inner and outer area. The sections cor-
respond to the following three categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluation of the
acceleration processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: moder-
ate acceleration, especially at
higher speeds
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluation of all deceler-
ation processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: antici-
patory driving, keeping your dis-
tance and early release of the
accelerator. The vehicle can
coast without use of the brakes.
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entire journey):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: con-
stant speed and avoidance of
unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driv-
ing style and light up green as a result of a par-
ticularly economical driving style. Depending
on the driving situation, up to two areas may
light up simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three
outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of
economical driving. A higher level indicates a
more economical driving style. If the three
outer areas are completely filled at the same
time, the driver has adopted the most eco-
nomical driving style for the selected settings
and prevailing conditions. The ECO display
border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. The additionally achieved
range displayed under Bonus fr. Start
Bonus fr. Start does
not indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
In addition to driving style, the actual con-
sumption is affected by other factors, such as:
R
Load
R
Tire pressure
R
Cold start
R
Choice of route
R
Active electrical consumers
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving a higher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program C or E
(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on
the highway, only the outer area for "constant"
will change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On
longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For
more marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 193).
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 192).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect, the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to
a lower gear in good time. This allows you to
150
Driving tips
Driving and parking
take advantage of engine braking. For this
you must first activate manual gearshifting.
This helps you to avoid overheating the
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking,
it is possible that a drive wheel will not
rotate for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the
drive train. This type of damage is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on
downhill gradients while the manual drive pro-
gram M is temporarily activated: the automatic
transmission may switch to the last active
automatic drive program E or S. The automatic
transmission may shift to a higher gear. This
can reduce the engine's braking effect.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving, the braking system can over-
heat. This increases the stopping distance
and can even cause the braking system to
fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
Never depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
cle washed, brake firmly while paying attention
to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
due may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
R
In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply
the brakes occasionally while paying atten-
tion to the traffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
R
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
!
The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
R
if the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
R
you hear a warning tone while the engine
is running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immedi-
ately. Consult a qualified specialist work-
shop to arrange this.
!
A function or performance test should only
be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified
specialist workshop in advance. You could
otherwise damage the drive train or the
brake system.
!
As the ESP
®
system operates automati-
cally, the engine and the ignition must be
switched off (the SmartKey must be in posi-
tion u or 1 in the ignition lock), if the
electric parking brake is tested on a braking
dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP
®
may cause severe damage to the brake sys-
tem.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Driving tips
151
Driving and parking
Z
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the function-
ality of your brakes at regular intervals.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 61).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your vehi-
cle which have been approved for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles or which correspond to an
equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/
linings which have not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which
corresponds to an equivalent quality standard.
Brake fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Checking brake lining thickness
You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
red) on the test gage allows you to determine
whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-
ment wallet in the glove box.
Front wheel
Rear wheel
X
Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gage
A.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 145).
X
Engage park position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Place test gage A between the wheel's
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
X
Hold test gage A vertically on brake
disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto
brake disc :.
X
Check which color field ? the arrow on
measuring pin ; is pointing to.
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is
sufficient.
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To avoid an inaccurate measurement:
R
make sure you position the wheels suitably
R
do not put the measuring pin on a recess in
the brake disc
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If the road surface is wet, hydroplaning may
occur depending on water level, speed and tire
tread depth.
152
Driving tips
Driving and parking
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed
R
avoid ruts
R
avoid sudden steering movements
R
brake carefully
Driving on flooded roads
!
Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front
or in the opposite direction create waves.
This may cause the maximum permissible
water depth to be exceeded.
Failure to observe these notes may result in
damage to the engine, electrical systems
and transmission.
If you have to drive on stretches of road on
which water has collected, please bear in mind
that:
R
in the case of standing water, the water
level may be no higher than the lower edge
of the vehicle body
R
you should drive no faster than walking pace
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect, the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter
the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehi-
cle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk
of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heat-
ing running, make sure the exhaust pipe and
area around the vehicle are clear of snow.
To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air,
open a window on the side of the vehicle
that is not facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise
control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
X
Try to bring the vehicle under control using
corrective steering.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially
in wooded areas or on bridges.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 307).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 306).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 306).
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
Driving tips
153
Driving and parking
Z
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system. There
is a risk of fire.
When driving on an unpaved road or off-
road, check the vehicle underside regularly.
In particular, remove trapped plant parts or
other flammable material. Contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately if dam-
age is detected.
!
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the
road
R
a heavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident,
no longer withstand the loads they are
designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody
and the underbody paneling. If these materi-
als come in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is
impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle
immediately, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
The vehicle is only designed for easily negotia-
ble off-road terrain and poor road surfaces.
When driving off-road, substances such as
sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil
may get into the brakes. This could result in a
reduced braking effect or in total brake failure
and also in increased wear and tear. The brak-
ing characteristics change depending on the
material entering the brakes. Clean the brakes
after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced
braking effect or grinding noises, have the
brake system checked in a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as possible. Adapt your
driving style to the different braking character-
istics.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of
damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead
to failure of the mechanical assembly or sys-
tems. Adapt your driving style to suit the ter-
rain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage
to the vehicle rectified immediately at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Do not shift into transmission position i
when driving off-road. You could lose control
of the vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehi-
cle using the service brake. If the gradient is
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
General notes
H
Environmental note
Protection of the environment is of primary
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Observe all prohibiting signs.
Read this section carefully before driving your
vehicle off-road.
Off-road driving is only possible with the
ON&OFFROAD package.
The following driving systems are specially
adapted for driving over easily negotiable off-
road terrain:
R
Off-road program (Y page 170)
R
Off-road ABS (Y page 60)
R
Off-road 4ETS (Y page 64)
R
Off-road ESP
®
(Y page 66)
R
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
(Y page 169)
Observe the following notes:
R
Stop the vehicle before starting to drive
along an off-road route. If necessary, acti-
vate the off-road program (Y page 132).
R
To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure
there is always sufficient ground clearance.
R
Check that items of luggage and loads are
stowed safely and are well secured
(Y page 255).
R
Always keep the engine running and in gear
when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-
vate DSR (Y page 169).
154
Driving tips
Driving and parking
R
Drive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a
walking pace.
R
Ensure that the wheels are in contact with
the ground at all times.
R
Drive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-
road routes where visibility is poor. For
safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first
and survey the off-road route.
R
Check the depth of water before fording riv-
ers and streams.
R
Watch out for obstacles.
R
Take care when turning on an uphill or
downhill slope or when driving across a
slope. The vehicle could otherwise tip over.
R
Always keep the side windows and the pan-
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
closed during the journey.
R
Do not deviate from marked routes.
R
Do not use the HOLD function when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradi-
ents or on slippery or loose surfaces. The
HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on
such surfaces.
Checklist before driving off-road
X
Engine oil level: check the engine oil level
and add oil if necessary.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
correct oil supply in the vehicle.
X
Wheels and tires: check the tire tread
depth and tire pressure.
X
Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
tires.
X
Replace any missing valve caps.
X
Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X
Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a
loss of tire pressure and damage the tire
bead. Before driving off-road, check the
wheels and replace them if necessary.
Checklist after driving off-road
!
If you detect damage to the vehicle after
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Deactivate off-road program (Y page 132).
X
Deactivate DSR (Y page 169).
X
Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
check for damage.
X
Clean the front and rear license plates.
X
Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet
and remove any foreign objects.
X
Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the
vehicle underside with a water jet; check for
any foreign objects and damage.
X
Check whether twigs or other parts of plants
have become trapped. These increase the
risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake
hoses or the air bellows of the axle joints
and propeller shafts.
X
After the trip, examine without fail the entire
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-
work structure, steering, chassis and
exhaust system for damage.
X
After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water or
similar dirty conditions, have the following
checked and cleaned:
R
brake discs
R
wheels
R
brake pads
R
axle joints
X
If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
travel, check for foreign objects in the
wheels and drive train and remove them if
necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
balance and cause vibrations.
Driving over poor road surfaces places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on nor-
mal roads. After driving off-road, check the
vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to
yourself and other road users.
Driving on sand
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
R
Activate the off-road program (Y page 132).
R
Avoid high engine speeds.
R
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
the terrain.
Driving tips
155
Driving and parking
Z
R
Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
become stuck in loose ground.
R
Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-
ble. Make sure that:
-
the tire ruts are not too deep.
-
the sand is sufficiently firm.
-
the ground clearance of the vehicle is suf-
ficient.
Tire ruts and gravel roads
!
Check that the ruts are not too deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged
or bottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving along
ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
gravel:
R
Activate the off-road program (Y page 132).
R
Avoid high engine speeds.
R
Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter.
R
Drive slowly.
R
Where ruts are too deep, drive with the
wheels of one side on the center grassy
area, if possible.
Traveling uphill
Approach/departure angle
G
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
R
Observe the warnings for off-road driving
(Y page 153).
R
Follow the line of fall when driving on slopes
and steep inclines.
R
Before driving on extreme uphill and down-
hill gradients, select the off-road program
(Y page 132).
R
Drive slowly.
R
Accelerate gently and make sure that the
wheels are gripping.
R
Avoid high engine speeds, except when driv-
ing on sandy and muddy routes with high
driving resistance.
R
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
the gradient.
R
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time
on long and steep downhill gradients.
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away
on a hill. For further information about hill
start assist, see (Y page 128).
Do not shift into transmission position i
when driving off-road. You could lose control
of the vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehi-
cle using the service brake. If the gradient is
too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in
reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure angle
values (Y page 340).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Always observe the maximum gradient climb-
ing ability values (Y page 340).
Hilltops
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi-
ately before reaching the brow of the hill.
Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to
travel over the brow.
This style of driving prevents:
R
the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
brow of a hill
R
the vehicle from traveling too quickly down
the other side
Driving downhill
R
Drive slowly.
R
Do not drive at an angle down steep
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip
and rollover.
R
Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand
steering wheel paddle shifter before tackling
steep downhill gradients.
156
Driving tips
Driving and parking
R
Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
of fall.
R
Check that the brakes are working normally
after a long downhill stretch.
Off-road ABS is activated when the off-road
program is selected.
At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. The
steerability of the vehicle is considerably
reduced if the wheels lock.
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-
cle is laden, you must select a low gear in
good time. You need to shift manually using
the steering wheel paddle shifters beforehand.
By doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
When the engine is running, you can use the
cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
technically permitted maximum speed of the
vehicle.
Use cruise control if road and traffic condi-
tions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period.
The speed indicated in the speedometer may
differ slightly from the speed stored.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in your
lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain
or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
Activates or increases speed
;
Activates or reduces speed
=
Deactivates cruise control
?
Activates at the current speed or last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the electric parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Driving systems
157
Driving and parking
Z
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ;.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If
you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for a higher speed, or
down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
sure point for a higher speed, or down ;
for a lower speed.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example,
if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise
control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards =.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
the vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake
R
you are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
you shift the transmission to position i
while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐
trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
i
When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC regulates
the speed and automatically helps you main-
tain the distance from the vehicle detected in
front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the
radar sensor system. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC brakes automatically to avoid
exceeding the set speed or to maintain the
designated distance from the vehicle in front.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that there is a risk of a collision with the vehi-
cle in front, you will be warned visually and
audibly. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
cannot prevent a collision without your inter-
vention. An intermittent warning tone will then
158
Driving systems
Driving and parking
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immedi-
ately in order to increase the distance to the
vehicle in front or take evasive action provided
it is safe to do so.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC operates in
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so,
you will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
and wearing too quickly.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
on roads with steep gradients.
For Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC to
assist you when driving, the radar sensor sys-
tem must be operational.
As Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC trans-
mits radar waves, it can resemble the radar
detectors of the responsible authorities. You
can refer to the relevant chapter in the Opera-
tor's Manual if questions are asked about this.
i
USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any
non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor
intervene in such situations. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot
always clearly identify other road users and
complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC warns you.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and
acoustic warning. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Adjust your speed in these cases and main-
tain sufficient distance.
Apply the brakes yourself and/or take eva-
sive action.
Driving systems
159
Driving and parking
Z
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither
reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to
adapt your driving style, nor override the laws
of physics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
cannot take into account road, weather or traf-
fic conditions. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
R
In road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
On slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain
or snow
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g.
motorcycles, or vehicles driving in a staggered
formation.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
There is snow or heavy rain
R
There is interference by other radar sources
R
There are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer
detects a vehicle in front, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may unexpectedly accelerate to
the speed stored.
This speed may:
R
Be too high if you are driving in a turning
lane or an exit lane
R
Be so high when driving in the right-hand
lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
hand lane
R
Be so high in the left lane that you pass
vehicles driving on the right
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;
To store the current speed or a lower
speed
=
To deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
?
To store the current speed or calls up the
last stored speed
A
To set a specified minimum distance
Activating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC,
all the following conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes of driving before Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is ready for use.
R
the electric parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
R
Active Parking Assist must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position h.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from j to h or your seat belt must
be fastened.
R
the front-passenger door must be closed.
R
DSR must be deactivated.
R
the vehicle must not skid.
Activating
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
Keep the cruise control lever pressed up :
or down ; until the desired speed is set.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Act. Distance Assist Sus‐
Act. Distance Assist Sus‐
pendedpended message appears in the multifunc-
tion display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the accel-
erator pedal.
Act. Distance Assist SuspendedAct. Distance Assist SuspendedYou can
also activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC when stationary. The lowest speed
that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
Driving with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Activating at the current speed or last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If
you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated, it stores the current
speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle
to the previously stored speed.
Pulling away and driving
X
If you want to pull away with Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot
from the brake pedal.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
or
X
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated: accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates
to the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a dif-
ferent line from another vehicle. The vehicle
then brakes automatically. Be ready to brake
at all times.
If there is no vehicle in front, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC operates in the same way
as cruise control.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
slower-moving vehicle in front, it brakes your
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
selected is maintained.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the
driving speed. However, the vehicle is only
accelerated up to the speed you have stored.
i
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deac-
tivated when you depress the brake, except
when the vehicle is stationary.
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
Selecting the drive program
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC supports a
sporty driving style when you select the S+
drive program (Y page 138) or the manual
drive program (Y page 140). Acceleration
behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed
is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have
selected the E (Mercedes-AMG vehicles: C)
drive program, the vehicle accelerates more
gently. This setting is recommended in stop-
and-start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you want to change to the overtaking lane
on multi-lane roads, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC supports you if:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is main-
taining the distance to a vehicle in front
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
currently detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
Stopping
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects
that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes
your vehicle until it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
i
After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
i
Depending on the specified minimum dis-
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front. The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated, the transmission is shifted automati-
cally to position j if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electric parking brake is applied automati-
cally if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
active when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is insufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
also shift to position j automatically.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly push
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decrea-
ses in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly push
the cruise control lever up : or down ;
beyond the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decrea-
ses in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
i
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not
deactivated if you depress the accelerator
pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC adjusts the vehi-
cle's speed to the last speed stored, after
you have finished overtaking.
Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by vary-
ing the time span between one and two sec-
onds. This determines the distance that Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from
the vehicle in front, depending on the road
speed. You can see this distance in the multi-
function display (Y page 164).
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
The specified minimum distance can be
changed while Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is switched on or off.
i
Make sure that you maintain the minimum
distance to the vehicle in front as required
by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.
X
To increase: turn control = in direc-
tion ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains a greater distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control = in direc-
tion :.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains a shorter distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivate Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the Active Distance AssistActive Distance Assist
OffOff message appears on the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
i
The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine. Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is automati-
cally deactivated if:
R
you engage the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured with the
electric parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
the transmission is in position j, k or i
R
you pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
R
the vehicle is skidding
R
you activate Active Parking Assist
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated automatically, you will hear a warning
tone. You will see the Active Distance
Active Distance
Assist OffAssist Off message on the multifunction dis-
play for approximately five seconds.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is also auto-
matically deactivated when you activate DSR.
The à DSR symbol appears in the multi-
function display.
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC dis-
plays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated and there are no vehicles detected in
front, one or two segments ; in the set
speed range light up.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front, segments ; from speed of
the vehicle in front = to stored speed : light
up.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed
on the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated
In the Assistance menu (Y page 196) of the
on-board computer, you can select the assis-
tance display.
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Your vehicle
X
Select the Assistance Graphic
Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 197).
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is activated
You will initially see the stored speed for
approximately five seconds when you activate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
=
Your vehicle
?
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active
(text only appears when the cruise control
lever is actuated)
X
Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 197).
Tips for driving with Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R
Cornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
to detect vehicles on bends is limited. Your
vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
R
Vehicles driving in a staggered formation:
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect vehicles that are not driving in the
middle of their lanes. The distance to the
vehicle in front will be too short.
R
Other vehicles changing lane: Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC has not detected
the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to
this vehicle will be too short.
R
Narrow vehicles: Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle
164
Driving systems
Driving and parking
in front on the edge of the road because of
its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle
in front will be too short.
R
Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not brake
for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a cor-
ner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is
revealed, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
will not brake for them.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may mis-
takenly detect vehicles that are crossing
your lane. If you activate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC under the following condi-
tions, the vehicle could pull away uninten-
tionally:
-
at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for
example
-
if there is a vehicle in front, after a cross-
ing, with the HOLD function activated
In such situations, brake if necessary. Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC will then be deacti-
vated.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
When pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
R
When maneuvering on steep slopes
R
When waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the vehicle is only braked using the HOLD
function, the vehicle may roll away in the fol-
lowing situations when you leave the vehi-
cle:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or
in the voltage supply
R
if the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant
There is a risk of an accident.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
secure the vehicle against rolling away
before you leave it.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 166).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
R
the vehicle is stationary
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function
R
the driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened
R
the electric parking brake is released
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated
R
the transmission is in position h, k or i
on vehicles with automatic transmission
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
cally if:
R
you accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
transmission: only when the transmission is
in position h or k.
R
the transmission is in position j on vehi-
cles with automatic transmission.
R
you depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until : disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
R
you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
R
you secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.
i
After a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
When the HOLD function is activated, the
transmission is automatically shifted to posi-
tion j if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
a system malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is insufficient
Start-off Assist (except Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use start-off assist, individual wheels
may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If
ESP
®
is deactivated, there is a greater dan-
ger of skidding and having an accident.
Make sure that no persons or obstacles are
in the vicinity of the vehicle.
Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration
from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip
road surface is required and the vehicle and
tires must be in good working order.
Do not activate start-off assist on public roads.
Observe the safety notes on driving safety sys-
tems (Y page 60).
Be sure to read the safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP
®
(Y page 63).
Activating start-off assist
X
Deactivate ESP
®
(Y page 197).
X
Turn the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position.
X
Firmly depress the brake pedal with your left
foot and keep it depressed.
X
Shift the transmission to position h.
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select
the S drive program (Y page 132).
X
Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the acceleration
process has ended. ESP
®
will otherwise not
be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Canceling start-off assist
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Important safety notes
i
RACE START must not be used on normal
roads. RACE START must only be activated
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside
of public road use.
i
RACE START is only available in
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles.
G
WARNING
If you use RACE START, individual tires may
start to spin and the vehicle could skid.
Depending on the selected ESP
®
mode,
there is an increased risk of skidding and
having an accident. Make sure that no per-
sons, animals or obstacles are within range
of the vehicle.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. For this, a suitably high-
grip road surface is required and the vehicle
and tires must be in good working order.
i
Observe the safety notes on driving safety
systems (Y page 60).
Be sure to read the safety notes and infor-
mation on ESP
®
(Y page 63).
Conditions for activation
You can activate RACE START if:
R
the doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed.
R
the engine is running and the transmission,
all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at
operating temperature.
R
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
R
the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal
is depressed (left foot).
R
the transmission is in position h.
R
drive program S, S+ or RACE is selected
(Y page 133)
Activating RACE START
X
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X
Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle
shifters.
X
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.
i
If the activation conditions are no longer
fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The
RACE START Not Possible See Opera‐RACE START Not Possible See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-
dle shifter (Y page 140).
or
X
To confirm: pull the right steering wheel
paddle shifter (Y page 140).
The RACE START Available Depress
RACE START Available Depress
gas pedalgas pedal message appears in the multi-
function display.
i
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
within a few seconds, RACE START is can-
celed. The multifunction display shows the
RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed is increased.
The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake to
startstart message appears in the multifunction
display.
i
If you do not release the brake pedal
within a short time, RACE START will be can-
celed. The multifunction display shows the
RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE START ActiveRACE START Active message appears
in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐RACE START Not Pos‐
sible See Operator's Manualsible See Operator's Manual or RACERACE
START CanceledSTART Canceled message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Driving systems
167
Driving and parking
Z
i
If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available
again after the vehicle has been driven a
certain distance.
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
wheel and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection of Sport or Com-
fort
The suspension setting is adjusted using the
corresponding button in the center console.
i
The mode can also be set using the AMG
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 133).
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode
is activated. For further information about
starting the engine, see (Y page 125).
Sport mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
Sport mode ensures even better contact with
the road. Select this mode when employing a
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country
roads.
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec-
ted Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT
AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select
this mode if you favor a more comfortable driv-
ing style, but also when driving fast on straight
roads, e.g. highways.
X
Press button : again so that indicator
lamp ; goes out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT
AMG Suspension System COMFORT
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
4MATIC
!
Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
This may damage the differential. Damage
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully
raised. Observe the instructions for towing
the vehicle with all wheels in full contact
with the ground.
4MATIC, together with ESP
®
, improves the
traction of your vehicle whenever a drive
wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot
take account of road, weather and traffic con-
ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are respon-
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
R
Accelerate less when driving.
i
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
168
Driving systems
Driving and parking
DSR
General notes
i
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is only
available for vehicles with the ON&OFF-
ROAD package.
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
selected on the on-board computer. The
steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the
DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driv-
ing on flat stretches of road or on an uphill
gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or
nonexistent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is
activated and the transmission is in position
h, k or i. You can drive at a higher or a
lower speed than that set on the on-board
computer at any time by accelerating or brak-
ing.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the speed driven and the set speed devi-
ate and you activate DSR on a slippery road
surface, the wheels may lose traction. There
is an increased danger of skidding and acci-
dents.
Before switching DSR on, please take into
consideration the road surface and the dif-
ference between driving speed and the set
speed.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor over-
ride the laws of physics. DSR cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic condi-
tions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
You are always responsible for keeping control
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may
not always be able to keep to the set speed,
depending on road surface and tire conditions.
Select a set speed suitable for the prevailing
conditions and when necessary, apply the
brakes manually.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 153).
Activating/deactivating DSR
If you activate DSR and no speed has been
set, the vehicle decelerates to 4 mph (Canada:
6 km/h).
You can only activate DSR when driving at
speeds below 19 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
Activating DSR
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The status indicator in the multifunction dis-
play shows, e.g. DSR 6 km/hDSR 6 km/h.
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the
DSR symbol appears on the multifunction dis-
play. You will also see the message: Max.Max.
Speed 30 km/hSpeed 30 km/h .
If you enter or exit a parking space using
Active Parking Assist, and press button :,
indicator lamp ; flashes. DSR can then not
be switched on.
Deactivating DSR
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The DSR symbol appears in the multifunc-
tion display with the OffOff message.
DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive
faster than 22 mph (Canada: 35 km/h). The
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play along with the OffOff message. You also
hear a warning tone.
Driving systems
169
Driving and parking
Z
Display in the assistance graphic
X
Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 197).
When DSR is activated symbol : appears
in the assistance graphics display.
Changing the set speed while the vehi-
cle is in motion
When DSR is activated, you can change the
set speed to a value between 2 mph and
11 mph (Canada: between 4 km/h and
18 km/h) while the vehicle is in motion.
X
To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre-
ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher set speed
or down ; for a lower set speed.
The set value appears in the status indicator
of the multifunction display.
Off-road program
General notes
i
The Off-road program is only available on
vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package.
The off-road program assists you in driving off-
road. The engine's performance characteris-
tics and the gearshifting characteristics of the
automatic transmission are adapted for this
purpose. ABS, ESP
®
and ETS programs espe-
cially adapted to off-road driving are also acti-
vated.
Do not use the off-road program on roads that
are snow-covered or icy or if you have moun-
ted snow chains on your vehicle.
For information on driving off-road, see
(Y page 153).
To activate/deactivate the off-road
program
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button :
(Y page 132) repeatedly until the Off-road
drive program is selected.
The status icon of the Off-road program is
shown in the multifunction display.
170
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Display in the assistance graphic
X
Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 197).
When the off-road program is activated,
symbol : appears in the assistance graphic
display.
Driving dynamics display (vehicles
with the ON&OFFROAD package)
General notes
Using the driving dynamics display in the mul-
timedia system display, you can see the drive
program you have selected as well as addi-
tional information on the vehicle's operating
status.
:
Drive program selected
;
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
=
Brake pedal position shown in %
?
DSR status indicator
A
Angle of inclination
B
Steering angle
C
Uphill or downhill gradient as a percentage
The accelerator and brake pedal position is
only available on certain Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles.
The DSR status indicator as well as the uphill
or downhill gradient as a percentage are not
available on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
Activating the driving dynamics dis-
play
X
Switch on the multimedia system; see the
separate multimedia system operating
instructions.
X
Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
multimedia system display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the
area around your vehicle using six sensors in
the front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between
your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the
maneuvering area when you are maneuvering
or parking.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC does not detect such
Driving systems
171
Driving and parking
Z
objects when they are in the immediate
vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the
vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not func-
tion correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position h, k or
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
R
below the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of
trucks
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them (Y page 282).
Range
:
Detection range of front sensors
;
Detection range of rear sensors
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.
15 cm)
If an obstacle is detected within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the
minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Warning displays
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
=
Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional if yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission
position of the automatic transmission and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi-
tion
Warning display
h
Front area activated
k, i or the vehi-
cle is rolling back-
wards
Rear and front areas
activated
j
No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle. In addi-
tion, warning tones are issued.
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient,
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
shorter the frequency of the intermittent warn-
ing tones becomes. When the minimum dis-
tance is reached, you hear a continuous warn-
ing tone.
Deactivating or activating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
:
Indicator lamp
;
Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Driving systems
173
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. You also
hear a warning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deac-
tivated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displays are lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
ference.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 282).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol
indicates a suitable parking space. Active
steering intervention and brake application
can assist you during parking and when exiting
a parking space. You can also still use Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 171).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your imme-
diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the maneuver-
ing area when you are maneuvering or parking.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
cause you to collide with other road users or
objects. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users or objects.
Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the
Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
!
If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for park-
ing, for example:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
174
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Parking tips:
R
On narrow roads, drive as close to the park-
ing space as possible
R
Parking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured
incorrectly
R
Parking spaces that are partially occupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly
R
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately
R
Pay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC during the
parking procedure (Y page 173).
R
You can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled
R
When transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Active
Parking Assist
R
Never use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed
R
Make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
R
that are parallel or at right-angles to the
direction of travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
on the same level as the road, e.g. not on
the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the detection range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you
into the parking space too early.
Active Parking Assist does not support you
parking in spaces at right angles to the direc-
tion of travel if:
R
two parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
R
the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
R
you park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not support you
parking in spaces that are parallel or at right
angles to the direction of travel if:
R
the parking space is on a curb
R
the system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass
paving blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to
maneuver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obsta-
cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Further information about the detection range
(Y page 172).
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection
range:
R
the Parking Package with rear view cam-
era may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
This could cause a collision. There is a risk
of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate the Parking Pack-
age with rear view camera.
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
cally when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
R
that are parallel or at right-angles to the
direction of travel
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Driving systems
175
Driving and parking
Z
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel
and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your
vehicle
R
at right angles to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehi-
cle
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as
a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only
displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
on the driver's side is activated. When parking
on the driver's side, this must remain activated
until you confirm the use of Active Parking
Assist by pressing the a button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel. The system automat-
ically determines whether the parking space is
parallel or at right-angles to the direction of
travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approximately
50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
G
WARNING
If you leave the driver's seat when the vehi-
cle is only being braked by the Parking Pack-
age with rear view camera, it could roll
away:
R
if there is a malfunction in the system or
in the voltage supply
R
if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses are
tampered with
R
if the battery is disconnected
R
if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i
If Active Parking Assist detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
while the vehicle is parking. You are respon-
sible for braking in good time.
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position k.
The Start Parking Assist?
Start Parking Assist? Yes: OKYes: OK No:No:
% message appears on the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brakeate and Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings
message appears on the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at
all times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
erwise, Active Parking Assist will be can-
celed.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
ing spaces.
The Parking Assist Active SelectParking Assist Active Select
DObserve SurroundingsDObserve Surroundings message appears
on the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position h while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brakeate and Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings
message appears on the multifunction dis-
play.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
front border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight park-
ing spaces.
176
Driving systems
Driving and parking
The Parking Assist Active Select RParking Assist Active Select R
Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings message appears on
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Active Parking Assist FinishedActive Parking Assist Finished mes-
sage appears and a warning tone sounds. The
vehicle is now parked.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal. The
braking effect is canceled when you depress
the accelerator pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake applica-
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,
you must steer and brake again yourself.
Active Parking Assist is still available.
Parking tips:
R
The way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent on
various factors. These include the position
and shape of the vehicles parked in front
and behind it and the conditions of the loca-
tion. It may be the case that Active Parking
Assist guides you too far into a parking
space, or not far enough into it. In some
cases, it may also lead you across or onto
the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking
procedure with Active Parking Assist.
R
You can also preselect transmission position
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive
as far into the parking space. Should the
transmission change take place too early,
the parking procedure is canceled. A sensi-
ble parking position can no longer be ach-
ieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support
you when exiting the parking space:
R
you need to have parked using Active Park-
ing Assist.
R
the border of the parking space must be
high enough at the front and the rear. A
curb stone is too small, for example.
R
the border of the parking space must not be
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
position as it is maneuvered into the parking
space.
R
a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
i
If Active Parking Assist detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
while the vehicle is exiting the parking
space. You are responsible for braking in
good time.
X
Start the engine.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the turn signal in the direction
you will drive out of the parking space.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
The Start Parking Assist?Start Parking Assist? Yes: OKYes: OK No:No:
% message appears on the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel
or pull away.
or
X
To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
Parking Assist Active Acceler‐
ate and Brakeate and Brake Observe SurroundingsObserve Surroundings
message appears on the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a
parking space. Otherwise, Active Parking
Assist will be canceled.
X
Depending on the message or as required,
shift the transmission to position h or k.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Parking AssistParking Assist
Active Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveObserve
SurroundingsSurroundings message appears on the
multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete
before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
the Active Parking Assist warning displays,
several times if necessary.
Driving systems
177
Driving and parking
Z
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and
the Active Parking Assist FinishedActive Parking Assist Finished mes-
sage appears on the multifunction display. You
will then have to steer and merge into traffic
on your own. Active Parking Assist is still avail-
able. You can take over the steering before the
vehicle has exited the parking space com-
pletely. This is useful, for example when you
recognize that it is already possible to pull out
of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
X
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Active Parking Assist Can‐Active Parking Assist Can‐
celedceled message appears in the multifunction
display.
or
X
Press the PARKTRONIC button
(Y page 173).
Active Parking Assist is switched off and
Active Parking Assist is immediately can-
celed. The Active Parking Assist Can‐Active Parking Assist Can‐
celedceled message appears in the multifunction
display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically
if:
R
the electric parking brake is engaged
R
transmission position j is selected
R
parking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible
R
you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
R
a wheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails. In
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
disappears and the multifunction display
shows the Active Parking Assist Can‐Active Parking Assist Can‐
celedceled message.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Rear view camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind
your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia
system display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 283).
i
The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting.
The following are examples of rear view
camera messages in the multimedia system
display.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects
in the maneuvering area when you are maneu-
vering or parking.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
R
if the tailgate is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
178
Driving systems
Driving and parking
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 283)
R
if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The field of vision and other functions of the
rear view camera may be restricted due to
additional accessories on the rear of the vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle
rack).
i
The contrast of the display may be affec-
ted by the sudden presence of sunlight or
other light sources, e.g. when exiting a
garage. Pay particular attention in this situa-
tion.
i
If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due
to pixel errors, have the display repaired or
replaced.
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gearActivation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia sys-
tem; see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown with
guide lines in the multimedia system dis-
play.
The image from the rear view camera is
available throughout the maneuvering proc-
ess.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to j or
after driving forwards a short distance.
The inner segments of the warning indicator
are displayed in red if there is a complete sys-
tem failure. The indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button lights up.
If the system fails at the rear of the vehicle:
R
the rear segments are shown in red when
backing up.
R
the rear segments are hidden when driving
forwards.
Messages in the multimedia system
display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bot-
tom-most guideline.
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking the course the tires
will take at the current steering wheel
angle (dynamic)
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
A
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
:
Front warning display
;
Additional measurement operational readi-
ness indicator for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
=
Rear warning display
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera-
tional (Y page 173), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are
active or light up, warning displays : and =
are also active or light up correspondingly in
the multimedia system display.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
:
White guide line without steering input –
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
?
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 179).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guide line : as a guide, care-
fully back up until you reach the end posi-
tion.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Reverse perpendicular parking with
steering input
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 179).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the park-
ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches
parking space marking :.
X
Maintain the steering input and reverse
carefully.
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
White guide line at the current steering
input
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
;
White guide line without steering input
=
End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
Driving systems
181
Driving and parking
Z
Wide-angle function
:
Symbol for the wide-angle view function
;
Your vehicle
=
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-
ted, for example.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of
four cameras.
The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two cameras in the exterior rear view mir-
rors
The cameras cover the immediate surround-
ings of the vehicle. The system supports you,
e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an
exit.
The 360° camera images can be shown in full
screen mode or in six different split-screen
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
This view is calculated from the data supplied
by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The six split-screen views are:
R
Top view and picture from the rear view
camera (130° viewing angle)
R
Top view and picture from the front camera
(without displaying the maximum steering
wheel angle)
R
Top view and enlarged rear view
R
Top view and enlarged front view
R
Top view and rear-view images from the
exterior mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
R
Top view and forward-view images from the
exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from position h or k to i,
you see the previous view in the COMAND dis-
play. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.
When you shift between transmission posi-
tions h and k, you see the previously selec-
ted front or rear view.
Important safety notes
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects
in the maneuvering area when you are maneu-
vering or parking.
The 360° camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at
all. It cannot show objects in the following
areas:
R
under the front bumper
R
very close to the front bumper
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
R
very close to the exterior mirrors
You are always responsible for safety, and
must always pay attention to your surround-
ings when parking and maneuvering. This
applies to the areas behind, in front of and
beside the vehicle. You could otherwise
endanger yourself and others.
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
tion in a limited manner:
R
if the doors are open
R
if the exterior mirrors are folded in
R
if the tailgate is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the cameras are exposed to very bright
light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
R
if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
R
if the vehicle components are damaged in
which the cameras are fitted. In this event,
have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage
to objects or the vehicle.
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
your vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-
era
R
COMAND is switched on; see the digital
COMAND operating instructions
R
the 360° Camera360° Camera function is activated
Switching on the 360° camera
X
Press and hold the Ø button on the cen-
ter console for longer than two seconds; see
the digital COMAND operating instructions.
The following appears depending on
whether gear h or k is selected:
R
full screen display with the image from
the front camera
R
full screen display with the image from
the rear view camera
Activating the 360° camera with
COMAND
X
Press the Ø button; see the digital
COMAND operating instructions.
X
Select System
System by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
X
Select 360° Camera360° Camera and press W to con-
firm.
The following appears depending on
whether gear h or k is selected:
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
For further information on the COMAND con-
troller; see the digital COMAND operating
instructions.
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gearActivation by R gear
function is selected in COMAND (see Digital
Operator's Manual).
X
To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The COMAND display shows the area behind
the vehicle in split screen:
R
vehicle with guide lines
R
top view of the vehicle
Information in the Digital Operator's
Manual
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find
information on the following topics:
R
Displays in the COMAND display
R
Display with the PARKTRONIC display
Exiting 360° camera display mode
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
10 mph (16 km/h) with the function activated,
the function switches off. The COMAND dis-
play switches back to the previously selected
view. You can also switch the display by
selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing W the COMAND controller to con-
firm.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It
is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.
Driving systems
183
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver.
It might not always recognize fatigue or
increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a sub-
stitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
R
if the length of the journey is less than
approximately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
R
if there is a strong side wind
R
if you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
R
if you are predominantly driving slower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
R
if the time has been set incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue
your journey and starts assessing your tired-
ness again if:
R
you switch off the engine
R
you take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break
Displaying the attention level
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistance menu (Y page 196)
of the on-board computer.
X
Select the Assistance display for Attention
Assist using the on-board computer
(Y page 197).
The following information is displayed:
R
The length of the journey since the last
break.
R
The Attention LevelAttention Level determined by
ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar dis-
play in five levels from high to low.
R
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a
warning, the System SuspendedSystem Suspended message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, such as when you are driving at a
speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
125 mph (200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 198).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selec-
ted:
StandardStandard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is
set to normal.
SensitiveSensitive selected: the sensitivity is set
higher. The attention level detected by Atten-
tion Assist is adapted accordingly and the
driver is warned earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistance graphic display.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-
ted, it is automatically reactivated after the
engine has been stopped. The sensitivity
selected corresponds to the last selection acti-
vated (standard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST Take aTake a
Break!
Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X
If necessary, take a break.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST
184
Driving systems
Driving and parking
still detects increasing lapses in concentra-
tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes
at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-
TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia
system: if a warning is output in the multi-
function display, a service station search is
performed in the multimedia system. You can
select a service station and navigation to this
service station will then begin. This function
can be activated or deactivated in the multi-
media system; see the Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 185) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 186).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
draws your attention to vehicles detected in
the monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible warn-
ing.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large
speed differential and overtake your vehi-
cle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk
of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure
that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or
slush. The sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Following a severe impact or in the event of
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no lon-
ger work properly.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
R
a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike or bicycle
R
the road has very wide lanes
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you are not driving in the middle of the lane
R
there are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to
it.
Driving systems
185
Driving and parking
Z
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner
side of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
R
warnings may be interrupted when you are
driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
such as trucks, for a prolonged time.
Warning display
:
Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator
lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is opera-
tional.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding side lights up red. This warning is
always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind
spot monitoring range from behind or from the
side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning
only occurs if the difference in speed is less
than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the
ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the cor-
responding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the
turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are
indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-
ted in the on-board computer (Y page 198).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front
of your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
era : which is attached behind the top of the
windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
markings on the road and can warn you before
you leave your lane unintentionally.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means
of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel
for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
detect lane markings.
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, espe-
cially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
G
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
cient illumination of the road, or due to
snow, rain, fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles
(e.g. if the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
there are no or several unclear lane mark-
ings for one lane, e.g. roadworks
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shade conditions
on the roadway
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 186).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are
shown in green (Y page 197). Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
If StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
.
When Adaptive
Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system detects certain condi-
tions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
R
the system detects solid lane markings
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes.
R
you cut the corner on a bend
Driving systems
187
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the multi-
function display. You should therefore make
sure your vehicle is operating safely at all
times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do
so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 32).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto-
matically controls the brightness of the multi-
function display. In daylight, the displays in the
instrument cluster are not illuminated.
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle interior
can be adjusted using the brightness control
knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 32).
X
Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.
Speedometer with segments
The speedometer is only divided into seg-
ments in vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC activated
(Y page 158):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front moving more slowly than the
stored speed:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
Tachometer
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The engine is limited within a range to protect
the engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
188
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 191).
There is a short delay before a change in out-
side temperature appears in the multifunction
display.
Coolant temperature gauge
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
!
A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 32).
The H marking in the coolant temperature
gauge corresponds to a coolant temperature
of approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
Under normal operating conditions and at the
correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
gauge may rise to the H marking.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Displays and operation
189
On-board computer and displays
Z
Left control panel
=
;
R
Calls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a submenu or function
R
In the AudioAudio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset
list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene
R
In the TelTel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a
name or telephone number
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the AudioAudio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired fre-
quency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is
open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display message
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts
dialing the selected number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Vehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control for navigation
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the
separate operating instructions)
R
Hides display messages or calls up the last TripTrip menu function used
R
Exits the phone book/redial memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in the TripTrip menu
Right control panel
ó
R
Vehicles with Audio 20:
Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions)
8
R
Mute
WX
R
Adjusts the volume
190
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the phone book/redial memory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
Multifunction display
:
Permanent display: outside temperature or
speed (Y page 199)
;
Time
=
Text field
?
Menu bar
A
Drive program (Y page 134)
B
Transmission position (Y page 136)
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in
the lower and upper part of the multifunction
display differ from the displays shown here.
X
To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after a few sec-
onds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
i
Set the time using the multimedia system;
see the Digital Operator's Manual.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 140)
R
jActive Parking Assist (Y page 174)
R
CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 157)
R
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 129)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 165)
R
DSRDSR Downhill Speed Regulation
(Y page 169)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 189).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
R
TripTrip menu (Y page 192)
R
Navi
Navi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 193)
R
AudioAudio menu (Y page 194)
R
TelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 195)
R
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 196)
R
Serv.Serv. menu (Y page 198)
R
Sett.Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 198)
R
AMGAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 200)
The displays for the AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTel
menus may differ slightly from those in your
vehicle.
The examples given in this Operator's Manual
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.
Menus and submenus
191
On-board computer and displays
Z
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the TripTrip menu with trip
odometer : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
From StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.
The values in the From Start
From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu was
reset (Y page 193).
In the following cases, the trip computer is
automatically reset From StartFrom Start:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From ResetFrom Reset.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
ECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 149).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only shows
range :.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the display
with approximate range : and current fuel
consumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered
is calculated according to your current driv-
ing style and the amount of fuel in the tank.
If there is only a small amount of fuel left in
the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
appears instead of approximate range :.
Recuperation display = shows you if
energy has been recuperated from the
kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in
the battery. Recuperation display =
depends on the engine installed and is
therefore not available in all vehicles.
192
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer ;.
A gear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation : when shifting manually
(Y page 140).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : to select YesYes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the
values in the "From Start" trip computer are
also reset. If you reset the values in the "From
Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO dis-
play are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can find further information on navigation
in the Digital Operator's Manual for the multi-
media system.
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course" symbol
Menus and submenus
193
On-board computer and displays
Z
Change of direction without lane recom-
mendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indica-
tor shortens towards the top of the display as
you approach the point of the announced
change of direction. The change of direction
starts once the distance display reaches zero.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Lanes not recommended
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if you stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of
direction without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
The navigation system displays additional
information and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
R
New Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route
A new route is calculated.
R
Road Not MappedRoad Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized,
e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private
land.
R
No RouteNo Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
R
O
You have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
:
Active station list
;
Station frequency with memory position
The multifunction display shows station ;
with station frequency or station name. The
preset position is only displayed along with
station ; if this has been stored.
194
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
radio (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select a preset list or station list:
press and briefly hold the 9 or : but-
ton until the preset list or station list in the
desired frequency range is shown.
X
To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i
SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
You can find further information on opera-
tion in the "Satellite radio" section of the
Digital Operator's Manual for the multimedia
system.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
:
Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and
switch on CD or MP3 mode (see the Digital
Operator's Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired track appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
Video DVD operation
You can only operate DVD videos in the AudioAudio
menu in vehicles with COMAND.
X
Switch on COMAND and select DVD Video
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
Menus and submenus
195
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Establish a Bluetooth
®
connection to the
multimedia system (see the Digital Opera-
tor's Manual).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
Phone READYPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the TelTel
menu, a display message appears in the multi-
function display.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you
are not in the TelTel menu.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call anytime, even if
you are not in the TelTel menu.
X
Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
X
Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
X
To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than one
second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X
If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
If you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
If you do not want to make the call: press
the ~ or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu:
R
Displaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 197)
R
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 197)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
(Y page 197)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 198)
R
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 198)
196
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select Assist.Assist.
GraphicGraphic.
X
Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC distance display
on the assistant display.
The assistance graphic displays the status
of and information from the following driving
systems or driving safety systems:
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(Y page 158)
R
Active Brake Assist (Y page 61)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 183)
R
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 186)
R
DSR (Y page 169)
R
Off-road program (Y page 170)
R
Rear window wipers (Y page 110)
X
Press : to display the ATTEN-
TION ASSIST assessment.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 64).
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles (Y page 65).
For further information about ESP
®
, see
(Y page 63).
X
Start the engine.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select ESPESP.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up con-
tinuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
continuously, ESP
®
is not available due to a
malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 235).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 204).
Activating/deactivating Active Brake
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake AssistBrake Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the assistance graphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(Y page 61).
Menus and submenus
197
On-board computer and displays
Z
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention AssistAttention Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set OffOff,
StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction
display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 183).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 185).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a again to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set OffOff,
StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
multifunction display shows the lane mark-
ings as bright lines in the assistance
graphic.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 186).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv.Serv. menu:
R
Calling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 203)
R
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only) (Y page 311)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(USA only) (Y page 311)
R
Calling up the service due date
(Y page 278)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Sett.Sett. menu:
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
R
Changing the light settings
R
Changing the vehicle settings
R
Changing the convenience settings
R
Restoring the factory settings
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
You will see the selected setting: kmkm or
milesmiles.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
198
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
R
Digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu
R
Odometer and the trip odometer
R
Trip computer
R
Current fuel consumption and approximate
range
R
Navigation instructions in the NaviNavi menu
R
Cruise control
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
If the additional speedometer is switched on,
the speed is shown in the status bar in the
multifunction display instead of the outside
temperature.
The speed display : is an alternative to your
speedometer.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h] or SpeedometerSpeedometer
[mph][mph] function.
You will see the selected setting: OnOn or OffOff.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display:
Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display
: is an alternative to your
speedometer.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.
Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display:Permanent Display: function.
The current setting, Outside TemperatureOutside Temperature
or Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/SpeedometerSpeedometer
[mph][mph], appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Lights
Switching the daytime running lamps
on/off
This function is not available in Canada.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function
has been switched on, the multifunction dis-
play shows the cone of light and the W
symbol in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
(Y page 102).
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
VehicleVehicle submenu.
Menus and submenus
199
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock
Automatic Door Lock function.
If the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function is
switched on, the multifunction display
shows the doors in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic lock-
ing feature, see (Y page 76).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
VehicleVehicle submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function is activated,
the multifunction display shows the &
symbol in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Comfort
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only available in Canada.
This function is only available when the vehicle
is equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐Auto. Mirror Fold‐
inging function, the exterior mirrors are folded in
when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
again.
If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. Mirror
FoldingFolding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 99), they will not fold out automati-
cally. The exterior mirrors can then only be fol-
ded out using the button on the door.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding
Auto. Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding
Auto. Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display
shows the exterior mirror in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory SettingFactory Setting submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select NoNo
or YesYes.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
If you have selected YesYes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime Running
LightsLights function in the LightLight submenu is only
reset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Transmission fluid temperature
200
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UPUP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine and transmission oil tempera-
ture: when the engine and transmission are
at normal operating temperature, oil tem-
perature ? and B are displayed in white in
the multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil tem-
perature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
SETUP
:
Drive system Comfort
Comfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
;
Chassis ComfortComfort/SportSport/Sport +Sport +
=
Transmission DD/MM
?
ESP
®
OnOn/OffOff or SPORT handling mode
SportSport
SETUP displays the following information and
functions:
R
the digital speedometer
R
the gear indicator
R
the drive system setting
R
the suspension mode
R
the transmission position
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) sta-
tus
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER
:
Lap
;
RACE TIMER
The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACE TIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. TimeInterm. Time.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
Menus and submenus
201
On-board computer and displays
Z
Starting a new lap
:
RACE TIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New LapNew Lap.
i
It is possible to store a maximum of six-
teen laps. The 16th lap can only be comple-
ted with Finish LapFinish Lap.
Stopping the RACE TIMER
X
Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
X
Confirm YesYes with a.
The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop
the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position
1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the Smart-
Key to position 3 and then press a StartStart
to confirm, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACE TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap
Reset Lap.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X
Reset the current lap.
X
Press a to confirm ResetReset.
Reset Race-Timer?Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the : button to select YesYes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMER overall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distance covered
A
Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
202
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until a lap evaluation
appears.
Each lap appears in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Man-
ual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 165)
R
Parking (Y page 145)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call
up the display messages:
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages
2 Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages
203
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP
®
(Elec-
tronic Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are
temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steer-
ing movements at speeds of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ABS, BAS, ESP
®
, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
204
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ESP
®
, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative See
Inoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ESP
®
, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable
due to a malfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
205
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
T !
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP
®
, the
HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a mal-
function.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
A warning tone sounds.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you perform a full brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Turn On the Igni‐
Turn On the Igni‐
tion to Releasetion to Release
the Parking Brakethe Parking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-
tion was switched off.
X
SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
X
KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Please ReleasePlease Release
Parking BrakeParking Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 148).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 148).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake SeeParking Brake See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
206
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 326).
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the front wheels towards the curb.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
207
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:
X
Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 146).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j as the electric parking brake
is not applied automatically.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Parking Brake Inop‐Parking Brake Inop‐
erativeerative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
voltage or undervoltage.
X
Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking
brake:
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Apply or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
208
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Check Brake Fluid
LevelLevel
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad
Check Brake Pad
WearWear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
Inoperative
Malfunction of one or more main functions of the Mercedes me con-
nect system.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me con‐Mercedes me con‐
nect Services Limi‐nect Services Limi‐
ted See Operator'sted See Operator's
ManualManual
Service limited.
Malfunction of one or more main functions of the Mercedes me con-
nect system.
X
Observe the notes on diagnostics connection (Y page 27).
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
209
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Currently LimitedCurrently Limited
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Restart the engine.
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist: SystemAssist: System
InoperativeInoperative
Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Situation-
dependent braking assistance may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Radar SensorsRadar Sensors
Dirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
R
dirt on sensors
R
heavy rain or snow
R
when driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunction-
ing or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message
disappears.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Clean all sensors (Y page 282).
X
Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
210
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
SRS MalfunctionSRS Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about the restraint system (Y page 39).
6
Front Left Malfunc‐Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or FrontFront
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or
right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
ter.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Servicetion Service
RequiredRequired or RearRear
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side CurtainLeft Side Curtain
Airbag MalfunctionAirbag Malfunction
Service RequiredService Required
or Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐
tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐
function Servicefunction Service
RequiredRequired
The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Front PassengerFront Passenger
Airbag DisabledAirbag Disabled
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
tivated during the journey, although:
R
an adult
or
R
a person of the corresponding stature is on the front passenger
seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may
not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Have the occupant on the front passenger seat get out of the
vehicle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up
simultaneously for approximately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp
is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated
the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 47)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
ManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the
multifunction display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indi-
cator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
212
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Further information about the Occupant Classification System
(Y page 47).
Front PassengerFront Passenger
Airbag Enabled SeeAirbag Enabled See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are ena-
bled during the journey, even though:
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat
or
R
the front passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight
on the seat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Open the front passenger door.
X
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front
passenger seat.
X
Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up
simultaneously for approximately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light
up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp
is on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag
and front-passenger knee air bag (Y page 47)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
ManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual display messages must not be shown on the
multifunction display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-
tem checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
Display messages
213
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indi-
cator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies
the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about the Occupant Classification System
(Y page 47).
Lights
i
Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Left Corner‐
Check Left Corner‐
ing Lighting Light or CheckCheck
Right CorneringRight Cornering
LightLight
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Low
Check Left Low
BeamBeam or CheckCheck
Right Low BeamRight Low Beam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear Left
Check Rear Left
Turn SignalTurn Signal or
Check Rear RightCheck Rear Right
Turn SignalTurn Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Check Front Left
Turn SignalTurn Signal or
Check Front RightCheck Front Right
Turn SignalTurn Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left MirrorCheck Left Mirror
Turn SignalTurn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Check Right Mirror
Turn SignalTurn Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-
tive.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
214
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Center BrakeCheck Center Brake
LampLamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left BrakeCheck Left Brake
LampLamp or Check RightCheck Right
Brake LampBrake Lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left HighCheck Left High
BeamBeam or CheckCheck
Right High BeamRight High Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
License Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Fog LampCheck Left Fog Lamp
or Check Right FogCheck Right Fog
LampLamp
The left or right-hand fog lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Rear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is faulty.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front LeftCheck Front Left
Parking LampParking Lamp or
Check Front RightCheck Front Right
Parking LampParking Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Backup Light
Backup Light
The backup lamp is defective.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left TailCheck Left Tail
LampLamp or CheckCheck
Right Tail LampRight Tail Lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
215
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check Front LeftCheck Front Left
Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp or
Check Front RightCheck Front Right
Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp
The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear LeftCheck Rear Left
Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear RightCheck Rear Right
Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Daytime
Check Left Daytime
Running LightRunning Light or
Check Right Day‐
Check Right Day‐
time Running Lighttime Running Light
The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 106).
or
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Malfunction See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp Function
Auto Lamp Function
InoperativeInoperative
The light sensor is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Turn the light switch to the à position.
b
Switch On HeadlampsSwitch On Headlamps
You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.
X
Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
216
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
+
Check CoolantCheck Coolant
Level See Opera‐Level See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient coolant in the
engine cooling system. You could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 276).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cool-
ing system checked.
?
The fan motor is malfunctioning.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the near-
est qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
?
Coolant Too HotCoolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle Turn
Engine OffEngine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
If the temperature increases again:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Display messages
217
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
See Operator's Man‐See Operator's Man‐
ualual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
R
a defective alternator
R
a torn poly-V-belt
R
a malfunction in the electronics
!
Do not drive any further. Otherwise the engine may overheat.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge
is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐See Oper‐
ator's Manualator's Manual.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
At Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficient engine oil. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 274).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 275).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
æ
Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
218
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ç
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ
Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak-
ing.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
X
If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Attention Assist
InoperativeInoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Ã
InoperativeInoperative
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunc-
tion.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 166).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 166).
Display messages
219
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Lane KeepingLane Keeping
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt
or snow
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Clean the windshield.
Lane KeepingLane Keeping
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Restart the engine.
Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist
InoperativeInoperative
Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist CanceledAssist Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
tened.
X
Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
220
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
X
While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-
function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 174).
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-
imately ten minutes (Y page 174).
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Active ParkingActive Parking
Assist FinishedAssist Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist OffAssist Off
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 163).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist Now Availa‐Assist Now Availa‐
bleble
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again after having
been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 160).
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations
or other sources of electromagnetic radiation
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range
R
the on-board voltage is too low
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Restart the engine.
Display messages
221
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is defective. Situation-dependent
brake force boosting may also have failed.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Act. DistanceAct. Distance
Assist SuspendedAssist Suspended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Act. DistanceAct. Distance
AssistAssist
- - - mph- - - mph
A condition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 160).
Cruise ControlCruise Control
InoperativeInoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise ControlCruise Control
- - - mph- - - mph
R
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit.
X
If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
or
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 157).
or
X
Reactivate ESP
®
(Y page 197).
222
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐
sure Soonsure Soon
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
R
you have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-
led new wheels and tires
R
the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-
sure.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 311).
Check Tire Pres‐Check Tire Pres‐
sure Then Restartsure Then Restart
Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
and has not been restarted since.
X
Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 311).
Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator
InoperativeInoperative
Canada only:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Please CorrectPlease Correct
Tire PressureTire Pressure
USA only:
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 311).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 314).
Display messages
223
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Check TiresCheck Tires
USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position appears in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 311).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire Mal‐Warning Tire Mal‐
functionfunction
USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position appears in the multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
R
a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
R
you could lose control of the vehicle
R
continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 287).
Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Currentlytor Currently
UnavailableUnavailable
USA only:
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire
pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
224
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐
sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing
USA only:
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
tires. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multi-
function display.
X
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Moni‐Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative Notor Inoperative No
Wheel SensorsWheel Sensors
USA only:
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X
Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Moni‐Tire Press. Moni‐
tor Inoperativetor Inoperative
USA only:
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Depress Brake toDepress Brake to
Start EngineStart Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position i without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P orTo Deselect P or
N, Depress BrakeN, Depress Brake
and Start Engineand Start Engine
You attempted to shift the transmission to position k or h with-
out starting the engine.
X
Start the engine.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
i
It is possible to shift the transmission from position j to the
desired position only if you depress the brake pedal. Only then
can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the
parking lock remains engaged.
i
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can
shift out of position j into another transmission position only
when the engine is running.
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Shift from 'P'Shift from 'P'
You attempted to shift the transmission to position k, i or h
without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
Display messages
225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Transmission NotTransmission Not
in P Risk of Vehi‐in P Risk of Vehi‐
cle Rolling Awaycle Rolling Away
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is
in position k, i or h.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Close the driver's door completely.
Service RequiredService Required
Do Not Shift GearsDo Not Shift Gears
Visit DealerVisit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position h.
If position k, i or j is selected:
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'
when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle is
StationaryStationary
The vehicle is moving.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
To Engage Trans‐To Engage Trans‐
miss. Position Rmiss. Position R
First Depress theFirst Depress the
BrakeBrake
You have attempted to shift from position h or i to position k.
X
Shift the transmission to position k with the brake pedal
depressed.
Reversing Not Pos‐Reversing Not Pos‐
sible Servicesible Service
RequiredRequired
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐
functionfunction
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐
function Stopfunction Stop
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
226
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Stop Vehicle ShiftStop Vehicle Shift
to P Leave Engineto P Leave Engine
RunningRunning
The automatic transmission has overheated.
X
Drive on carefully.
The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the
display message has disappeared.
Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary Battery
MalfunctionMalfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Until then, always shift the transmission to position j before
you switch off the engine.
X
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Trans. Oil Overhea‐Trans. Oil Overhea‐
ted Drive on withted Drive on with
CareCare
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.
Manual drive program p and the temporarily active manual drive
program are no longer available. The engine power output is
reduced.
X
Allow the vehicle to cool down.
4matic Currently4matic Currently
UnavailableUnavailable
4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
X
Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again
and the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic Inoperative4matic Inoperative
4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
A
The tailgate is open
G
WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X
Close the tailgate.
Display messages
227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
The hood is open.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Close all the doors.
Ð
Power Steering Mal‐
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐function See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you are unable to steer safely:
X
Do not drive on.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No ServicePhone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
¥
Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 276).
Wiper Malfunction‐Wiper Malfunction‐
inging
The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard WarningHazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐Flashers Malfunc‐
tioningtioning
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
228
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Key Does NotKey Does Not
Belong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key fromTake Your Key from
IgnitionIgnition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
A warning tone sounds
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key BatteryReplace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change the battery (Y page 72).
Â
Don't Forget YourDon't Forget Your
KeyKey
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is
only a reminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
trally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Locate the SmartKey.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,
the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Display messages
229
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(white display message)
The SmartKey is currently undetected.
X
Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â
Remove 'Start' But‐Remove 'Start' But‐
ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indi-
cator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after start-
ing the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N After engine start, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten
their seat belts.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition,
a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
The warning tone ceases.
230
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as
the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is
being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
M Solutions
é
N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The brake system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The braking characteristics may be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Drive on taking extra care.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may
be affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
232
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program), the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also a possibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be availa-
ble.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform a full
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a
speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp
goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
, the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform a full
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
234
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
!
֌
$J
N $(USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yel-
low ABS, ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform a full
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 64).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is deactivated. ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
wheel starts to spin.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 64).
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP
®
checked.
M
N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehi-
cle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions
described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP
®
" section (Y page 65).
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ESP
®
, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
236
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ESP
®
, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a
speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp
goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!F
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the elec-
tric parking brake lights up.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system
checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
237
On-board computer and displays
Z
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignition system
R
in the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emer-
gency mode.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
i
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the
legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such
legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
æ
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circum-
stances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
238
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked
or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 276).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the
engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can
occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine
has cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 276).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
239
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A
warning tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at
too high a speed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 61).
240
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is
lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers.
Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 145).
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 311).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
241
On-board computer and displays
Z
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for
operation. More information can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following
into account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
a diverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you
from traffic conditions and driving, and
increase the risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that is deemed to comply without maxi-
mum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
However, it is recommended to install it at a
distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm)
between the radiation source and a person's
body (not including limbs such as hands,
wrists, feet and legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components,
their software as well as wiring can impair
their function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular, sys-
tems relevant to safety could also be affec-
ted. As a result, these may no longer func-
tion as intended and/or jeopardize the oper-
ating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in
motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or a message will appear
to this effect.
242
Function restrictions
Multimedia system
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in front of the dis-
play for storage. Objects placed here could
damage the display or impair its function.
Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface
may result in impairments to the display,
which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-
controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is
too high. The display may temporarily switch
off completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during an active call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the sta-
tus line will show the 8 symbol. If you
switch the media source or set the volume,
the sound is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functions with system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or
to call up the main menu of the current operat-
ing mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the current operating mode.
Operating system
243
Multimedia system
Z
Favorites button
You can assign predefined functions using the
g favorites button and call them up by
pressing the button (Y page 244).
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the g button on the
controller.
X
Select a favorite, e.g. VehicleVehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To exit: press the g button again.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the g button.
X
COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X
Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller.
The menu bar is displayed.
X
Select ReassignReassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X
Select a favorite.
X
COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn and press the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
X
Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press
the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for
example.
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQVehicle SettingsVehicle Settings.
X
Press and hold the g button until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Add a favorite to the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception.
In certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin
®
MAP PILOT
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions). The Garmin
®
MAP PILOT operating
instructions are stored on the SD card as a
PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick
guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route
options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select OptionsOptionsQRoute SettingsRoute Settings.
244
Operating system
Multimedia system
Notes for route types:
R
Eco RouteEco Route
R
Dynamic Traffic RouteDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route
guidance are taken into account (not availa-
ble in all countries).
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After RequestDynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traf-
fic reports should be included in the route
calculation (not available in all countries).
R
Calculate Alternative RoutesCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In
order to do so, instead of StartStart, select the
menu item Continue
Continue.
X
To avoid/use route options: select
Avoid Options
Avoid Options.
X
Select a route option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll RoadsUse Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationDestinationQAddress EntryAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select CityCity.
The city in which the vehicle is currently
located (current vehicle position) is at the
top. Below this, you will see locations for
which route guidance has already been car-
ried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there
are different ZIP codes available for the
location, the corresponding digits are dis-
played with an XX.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
R
select the last destination
R
select a contact
R
select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name
or telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate desti-
nations.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered
and is in the menu.
X
Select StartStart or ContinueContinue.
The route is calculated with the selected
route type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activa-
ted, a prompt will appear asking whether
you wish to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the exist-
ing destination and opens the intermediate
destinations list.
Operating system
245
Multimedia system
Z
Connecting a mobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone.
The mobile phone must support Hands-Free
Profile 1.0 or above.
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one
manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the
Customer Relations Center on
1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (con-
necting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need
to search for the phone and then authorize
(connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone,
authorization either takes place by means of
Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a pass-
key. The multimedia system automatically
makes the procedure that is relevant for your
mobile phone available. The mobile phone is
always connected automatically after authori-
zation. Further information on using a mobile
phone with the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to
the multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/Tel/®QConn.Conn.
DeviceDeviceQSearch for PhonesSearch for PhonesQStartStart
Search
Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia sys-
tem and on the mobile phone.
X
If codes match: select YesYes on the multime-
dia system.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and
for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles.
The prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select No
No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
246
Operating system
Multimedia system
Authorization by entering a passkey (pass-
code):
X
Select the Bluetooth
®
name of the mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number com-
bination as a passkey.
X
Enter the passkey on the multimedia sys-
tem.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the
mobile phone. Depending on the mobile
phone used, confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and
MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to
confirm may take up to two minutes to be
displayed (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio
20)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require at least one Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phone depending on use of one-telephone
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or
above.
In two-telephone mode you can use all the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone. With the additional tele-
phone, you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one
manufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information is transmitted after you con-
nect the main telephone:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the
Customer Relations Center on
1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (con-
necting) a mobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need
to search for the phone and then authorize
(connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone,
authorization either takes place by means of
Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a pass-
key. The multimedia system automatically
makes the procedure that is relevant for your
mobile phone available. The mobile phone is
always connected automatically after authori-
zation. Further information on using a mobile
phone with the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/Tel/®QConn. DeviceConn. DeviceQCon‐Con‐
nect New Devicenect New Device.
X
Select Connect via VehicleConnect via Vehicle.
X
Select mobile phone.
Operating system
247
Multimedia system
Z
Connecting a mobile phone
X
One-telephone mode: select Connect asConnect as
New Main PhoneNew Main Phone.
X
Two-telephone mode: select Connect asConnect as
Additional Phone
Additional Phone when a mobile phone is
already connected.
X
Authorization using Secure Simple Pair-
ing:
A code is displayed in the multimedia sys-
tem and on the mobile phone.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and
for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles.
The prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select No
No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
or
X
Authorization by entering a passkey
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit
number sequence which you have chosen
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the
mobile phone. Depending on the mobile
phone used, confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and
MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to
confirm may take up to two minutes to be
displayed (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Symbols in the device manager
The symbols are shown in color depending on
their use.
Symbol Explanation
Mobile phone connected to the
multimedia system
Main telephone with full range of
functions
Additional telephone for incom-
ing calls in two telephone mode
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the
appropriate media mode must already be
turned on. Further information on media mode
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
(Y page 249)
R
CD
R
DVD (COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
Via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on single CD/DVD drive or
DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
Selecting using the device list
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaMediaQDevicesDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil-
dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
If the SD card is no longer in use, you
should take it out and remove it from the
vehicle. High temperatures can damage the
card.
248
Operating system
Multimedia system
Inserting an SD card
The SD card slot is located on the control
panel.
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face down.
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
There are two USB ports in the stowage
space under the armrest.
X
Select the media source (Y page 248).
Operating system
249
Multimedia system
Z
Loading guidelines
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
tip over or be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking
or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior
if the tailgate is open while the engine is
running, especially if the vehicle is in
motion. There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate
open.
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself. There is a risk of burns.
Always be particularly careful and supervise
children closely around the exhaust pipe and
the exhaust pipe trims. Allow these compo-
nents to cool down before touching them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle.
Observe the following notes when loading and
transporting a load:
R
Never exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door.
R
The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
R
Position heavy loads as far forward as possi-
ble and as low down in the cargo compart-
ment as possible.
R
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
Always place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
R
Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
Use the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
R
Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
R
The maximum load capacity of the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor is
55 lbs (25 kg).
R
Secure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges
for protection.
!
Do not position the load on one part of the
folding cargo compartment floor only. The
maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis-
tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging
the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid
board under the load if necessary. Please
note that the load on the cargo compart-
ment floor will be increased when the load
is lashed down.
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle inte-
rior and these are not adequately secured,
they could slip or be flung around and
thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addi-
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone brackets may not always be
250
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
able to hold the objects placed in them in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sharp
braking or sudden changes of direction.
R
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects
in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 250).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
There is a pen holder at the top of the glove
box flap.
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: press marking :.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front cen-
ter console
X
To open: press the marking on cover :.
i
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
there may be an ashtray in the center con-
sole instead of a storage compartment.
Stowage compartment in front of the
armrest (vehicles with automatic trans-
mission)
Stowage areas
251
Stowage and features
Z
X
To open: press the marking on cover :.
i
You can remove the non-slip mat and the
insert for cleaning. When removing the
insert you will have to overcome some slight
resistance.
Stowage compartment under the arm-
rest
X
To open: on vehicles with movable armr-
ests, make sure that the armrest is in the
rearmost position.
X
Press button : and fold the armrest up.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the arm-
rest can be moved backwards or forwards in a
longitudinal direction.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card
slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an
iPod
®
, iPhone
®
or MP3 player (see the Digital
Operator's Manual).
Stowage compartments in the rear
passenger compartment
Stowage compartment in the rear
passenger compartment center console
X
To open: pull down the top of stowage com-
partment : by the edge of the handle.
i
Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.
Parcel nets
Stowage nets are located:
R
in the front-passenger footwell
R
on the back of the driver's and the front-
passenger seat
R
on the left and right-hand side in the cargo
compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 250)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 250).
Folding backrest on the front-
passenger seat (Canada only)
G
WARNING
If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is
folded forward, rear seat passengers can
come in contact with parts of the seat
mechanism. particularly in the event of an
accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
of direction. There is a risk of injury.
If a passenger travels in the vehicle while
the front-passenger seat is folded forward,
they must sit in the rear seat behind the
driver.
The backrest of the front-passenger seat can
be folded forwards to increase the cargo com-
partment capacity.
Once you no longer need the backrest on the
front-passenger side to be used as a load sur-
face, fold the backrest back into place.
252
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
X
To fold forward: gently push the backrest
back.
X
Pull release handle : and fold the backrest
fully onto the seat cushion until it engages.
X
To fold back: gently push the backrest
down and pull release handle :.
X
Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
Through-loading facility in the rear
passenger compartment
X
To open: fold down seat armrest :.
X
Pull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 95).
X
Slide locking mechanism = in the direction
of the arrow.
X
Swing flap ; fully to the side.
Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
X
To close: swing flap ; in the cargo com-
partment back until it engages.
X
Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 250).
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in
the event of an accident.
R
The vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear
bench seat/rear seat or by the seat back-
rest. The seat belt can no longer offer the
intended level of protection and could
even cause injuries.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
!
Before folding the backrest in the rear
compartment forwards, make sure that the
rear compartment armrest and the cup
holder are folded in. They may otherwise be
damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 250).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ests can be folded forward separately to
increase the cargo compartment capacity.
Stowage areas
253
Stowage and features
Z
Notes on using the cargo compart-
ment
Making the best use of your cargo compart-
ment:
R
You can increase the load capacity by
adjusting the backrest to the cargo position
(Y page 254).
R
The load area can be lengthened by folding
forward the folding backrest of the front-
passenger seat (Y page 252) and the corre-
sponding backrest in the rear.
Folding the rear seat backrest forward
and back
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
X
Fully insert the backrest head restraints if
necessary (Y page 96).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Pull left-hand or right-hand release han-
dle ; of the seat backrest forward.
Corresponding seat backrest : is released.
X
Fold backrest : forward.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X
Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
!
Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
X
Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 96).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
backrests (cargo position)
254
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Vehicles with the cargo compartment pack-
age: to enlarge the cargo compartment, you
can adjust the rear seat backrests to a 15°
steeper angle (cargo position).
X
Fold the seat backrest forward
(Y page 254).
X
Move handle : in the direction of the
arrow.
X
Push back seat backrest ; as far as han-
dle : until the backrest engages.
The backrest is now in the cargo position.
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
R
Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 250).
R
Secure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
R
Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
R
Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-
slip protection for light loads.
R
Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
R
Pad sharp edges for protection.
:
Cargo tie-down rings
Bag hook
G
WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-
gage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
!
The bag hook can bear a maximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
:
Bag hook
Parcel shelf
!
The maximum load which may be placed
on the parcel shelf is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
X
To remove: detach straps : from the tail-
gate.
X
Fold the parcel shelf downwards.
X
Pull the parcel shelf out to the rear ;.
X
To install: place the parcel shelf on the
guide rails on the left and right.
X
Push the parcel shelf evenly forwards using
both hands until it engages.
X
Fold the parcel shelf up.
X
Attach straps : to the tailgate.
Stowage areas
255
Stowage and features
Z
Stowage well under the cargo com-
partment floor
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment
floor is open, objects could be flung around,
thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud-
den braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
!
The maximum load capacity of the stow-
age well under the cargo compartment floor
is 55 lbs (25 kg).
There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehi-
cle tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the
cargo compartment floor.
Opening/closing the cargo compart-
ment floor
X
To open: open the tailgate.
X
Unlock the cargo compartment floor.
X
Holding ribbing ;, press handle : down-
wards.
Handle : folds up.
X
Using handle :, swing the cargo compart-
ment floor upwards as far as side flaps =,
then overcome the resistance of flaps =.
X
Place the cargo compartment floor on side
flaps =.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the usual driving
characteristics, as well as steering and brak-
ing, change. The vehicle tilts more severely
when cornering and may react more slug-
gishly to steering input.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the
driving characteristics, as well as the steer-
ing and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust your driving style and never exceed
the maximum roof load.
!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open
the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is
installed.
256
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 339).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the
roof carrier manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
Attaching the roof carrier
X
Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. In
doing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container
secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup
holder whilst traveling, the container may be
flung around and liquid may be spilled. The
vehicle occupants may come into contact
with the liquid and if it is hot, they may be
scalded. You may be distracted from the
traffic conditions and you could lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
tainers of the right size. Always close the
container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
G
WARNING
The heating elements of the cup holder can
become very hot. You could burn yourself on
them.
There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the hot heating elements of
the cup holder. Always make sure that chil-
dren cannot access the hot heating ele-
ments of the cup holder. Never leave chil-
dren unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle inte-
rior and these are not adequately secured,
they could slip or be flung around and
thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addi-
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
mobile phone brackets may not always be
able to hold the objects placed in them in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sharp
braking or sudden changes of direction.
R
Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or
similar situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects
in the cargo compartment.
!
Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 250).
The stowage compartments in the doors pro-
vide space for bottles:
R
front: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)
R
rear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front center console
:
Cup holder
Features
257
Stowage and features
Z
The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath
can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with
clean, lukewarm water only.
X
To remove: carefully pull in upper sections
of cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release.
X
Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can
be removed.
X
To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage compart-
ment. Insert the cup holder so that the
wedge of the upper section of cup holder :
faces forwards.
X
Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X
To close: slide cup holder : or ; back
until it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is fol-
ded up when the vehicle is in motion, you
could be blinded by incident light. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
=
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
258
Features
Stowage and features
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A
has been folded up.
Glare from the side
X
Fold down the sun visor.
X
Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X
Swing the sun visor to the side.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
!
The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-
rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the
stowage space could be damaged.
X
Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
To remove the insert: lift insert = up ;
and out.
X
To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
i
If you remove the ashtray insert, you can
use the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear compartment ashtray
X
To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
X
To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
the direction of arrow ? until it audibly
releases.
X
Lift insert ; up and out.
X
To install the insert: install insert ; from
above into the holder and press down until it
engages.
Cigarette lighter
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga-
rette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite
if:
R
the hot cigarette lighter falls
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob. Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
Features
259
Stowage and features
Z
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the
sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that
there is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front center console
X
Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of the cover.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the rear passenger compart-
ment center console
X
Pull the cover out by the top of the handle
edge.
X
Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the cargo compartment
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Mercedes me connect
General notes
A license agreement must be in place in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make sure that your system is activated and
operational. To register, press the ï MB
Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent to
you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log
onto the Mercedes me connect area under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
260
Features
Stowage and features
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
R
a service subscription is available
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available
R
the vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center
The Mercedes me connect system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use the multimedia system's volume con-
trol.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
Roadside Assistance call
R
MB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detec-
ted if one of the following occurs:
R
The indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance call button does not light up dur-
ing self-diagnosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagno-
sis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F Roadside Assistance call button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
After the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐
Inoper‐
ativeative or Service Not ActivatedService Not Activated mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
the event of an emergency, help will have to
be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the
following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in
an emergency if:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an acci-
dent
R
the vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily
be seen by other road users, particularly
when dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or sim-
ilar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national regu-
lations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
A license agreement must be in place in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make sure that your system is activated and
Features
261
Stowage and features
Z
operational. To register, press the ï MB
Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered.
i
You cannot end an automatically triggered
emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting Call
Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call ConnectedCall Connected message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle (as deter-
mined by the GPS system)
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants are responsive, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle
If no voice connection can be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter, the system has been unable to initiate an
emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call Failed
Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
i
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
Mercedes me connect is not able to make
an emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
immediately after pressing the SOS button,
you do not know if Mercedes me connect
has successfully made the emergency call.
In this case, always summon assistance by
other means.
262
Features
Stowage and features
Roadside Assistance call button
X
Press Roadside Assistance call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
call button : flashes while the call is
active. The multifunction display shows the
Connecting CallConnecting Call message. The audio out-
put is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
Call Con‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicle identification number
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
cates that a call is active. During the call,
you can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia
system, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page 266).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz
technician or makes arrangements for your
vehicle to be transported to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
You may be charged for services such as
repair work and/or towing.
You can obtain further information from your
Mercedes me connect manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-
tance call button : is flashing continu-
ously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center has
been established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
MB Info call button
X
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The multifunction display shows the Con‐Con‐
necting Callnecting Call message. The audio system
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
Features
263
Stowage and features
Z
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicle identification number
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
cates that a call is active. During the call,
you can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia
system, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center and about other products and
services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the Mercedes me connect system under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call but-
ton : is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center has
been established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-
gency call will take priority and override all
other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
R
the corresponding button in the multimedia
system to end the voice call
i
When a call is initiated, the audio system
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to the multimedia system. How-
ever, if you want to use your mobile phone,
do so only when the vehicle is stationary
and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to
a database with over 15 million points of inter-
est (POIs). These can be downloaded on the
navigation system in your vehicle. If you know
the destination, the address can be downloa-
ded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location
of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destina-
tions in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
i
If you select NoNo, the address can be saved
in the address book.
i
The Destination Download function is
available if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is available and data transfer is possi-
ble.
i
The Destination Download function can
only be used if the vehicle is equipped with
a navigation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the Mercedes me con-
nect PLUS Package and cannot be obtained
separately.
i
You can also use the Route Assistance
function if your vehicle is not equipped with
a navigation system.
264
Features
Stowage and features
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of nav-
igation support without having to leave your
vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
will then be guided live through the current
route section.
Search and Send
General notes
i
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must
be equipped with Mercedes me connect and
a navigation system. Additionally, a
Mercedes me connect service subscription
must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service.
A destination address found on Google Maps™
can be transferred via Mercedes me connect
directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X
Go to the website http://
www.maps.google.com and enter a destina-
tion address into the entry field.
X
To send the destination address to the e-
mail address of your Mercedes me con-
nect account: click the corresponding but-
ton on the website.
i
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
X
If the "Send" dialog window appears: in
the corresponding field enter the e-mail
address that you specified when setting up
your Mercedes me connect account.
X
Click "Send".
i
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on
the website.
Calling up destination addresses
X
Switch on the ignition.
The destination address is loaded into the
vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
X
Select Yes
Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY
the controller and confirm with W.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
i
If you select No
No, the address can be saved
in the address book.
i
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately.
i
Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
sent.
If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles
with Mercedes me connect and active
Mercedes me connect accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be unlocked by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately unlocked
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-
ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked remotely.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
X
Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
Features
265
Stowage and features
Z
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
telephone applications (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android
®
)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i
Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network is
accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle valet locking feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle
and you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately locked
remotely up to four days after the ignition was
last switched off. After this time, valet locking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked
remotely.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Doors Locked
RemotelyRemotely message will appear on the multi-
function display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
locked via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
telephone applications (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android
®
)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i
The vehicle valet locking feature is availa-
ble when the relevant mobile phone network
is available and data connection is possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X
This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contacts you and the local law enforcement
agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency
is informed of the location of the vehicle.
i
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated
for longer than 30 seconds, Mercedes me
connect automatically notifies the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center. The customer
service representative can use the received
data to decide what kind of assistance is
required. You are then, for example, guided to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or
a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
Center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐
tance Connectedtance Connected message on the multimedia
system display. If the vehicle remote malfunc-
tion diagnosis can be started, the RequestRequest
for vehicle diagnosis received.
for vehicle diagnosis received.
Start vehicle diagnosis?Start vehicle diagnosis? message
appears in the display.
X
Confirm the message with YesYes.
X
When the Vehicle diagnosis: PleaseVehicle diagnosis: Please
start ignitionstart ignition message appears, turn
the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (Y page 125).
X
When the Please follow the instruc‐
Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and move
your vehicle to a safe positionyour vehicle to a safe position mes-
266
Features
Stowage and features
sage appears, follow the customer service
representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select CancelCancel the remote malfunction
diagnosis is canceled completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosis
activated.activated. message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSend
vehicle diagnostics data (Voice con‐vehicle diagnostics data (Voice con‐
nection may be interrupted duringnection may be interrupted during
data transfer)data transfer) message appears. The vehi-
cle data can now be sent to the Customer
Assistance center.
X
Press OK
OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:
Transferring data...Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check
is the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the mul-
timedia system display shows a message to
this effect together with information about any
special offers at your workshop.
USA only: this information can also be called
up under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on Roadside Assistance
(Y page 26).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
tem. To do this, an SD memory card must be
inserted into the multimedia system. If no SD
memory card is inserted, you must insert the
card into the card slot on the multimedia sys-
tem before saving the route.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the
Mercedes me connect portal on the Internet.
Each route can include up to 20 way points.
Once a route has been received by the naviga-
tion system, you will see the <route name><route name>
has been saved to memory card. Dohas been saved to memory card. Do
you want to start route guidance?you want to start route guidance? mes-
sage in the multimedia system display. The
route is saved to the SD memory card.
X
To start route guidance: select YesYes.
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play.
i
If you select NoNo, the saved route can be
called up later via the navigation menu.
X
Select StartStart.
Route guidance starts.
i
Downloaded and saved routes can be
called up again in the multimedia system.
You can find information about this in the
separate operating instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-
cle, a message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance
Center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
R
the location where the speed limit was
exceeded
R
the time at which the speed limit was excee-
ded
R
the selected speed limit which was excee-
ded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the bounda-
ries of the selected areas. You can select the
way in which you receive this information
beforehand. Possible options include text mes-
sage, e-mail or an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
Features
267
Stowage and features
Z
You can specify up to ten areas simultane-
ously. Different settings are possible for each
area.
USA only: these settings can be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service representa-
tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
text message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
panic alarm via text message. An alarm
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate
up to three different door and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not
leave the engine running while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated
garage door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 27).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the door with
the integrated garage door opener, persons
in the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or be struck by the door.
There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the door.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can result in poisoning. There is a
risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the
engine running an enclosed space without
adequate ventilation.
Programming
Programming the buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 268).
268
Features
Stowage and features
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to control
the garage door drive.
X
To start program mode: press and hold
one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program
mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :
lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first
time. If the selected button has already
been programed, indicator lamp : will only
light up yellow after ten seconds have
elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a
distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code
(Y page 269).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote con-
trol A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another posi-
tion.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 268).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you
will need to use the programming button on
the door drive control panel. The programming
button may be located in different places
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually
located on the door drive unit on the garage
ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
ing out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door opener.
Features
269
Stowage and features
Z
The signal is not detected during program-
ming. Comparable with Canadian law, some
U.S. garage door openers also feature a
"break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) as you follow the programming
steps.
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then release it for
two seconds.
X
Press button B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is
to synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote con-
trol A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another posi-
tion.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit
a strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from but-
tons ; to ? which you are programming.
Try various angles at a distance between
2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same
angle but at varying distances.
R
If another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control A. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote control
A.
R
Note that some remote controls only trans-
mit for a limited amount of time (the indica-
tor lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control. Please
also read the operating instructions for the
garage door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission
270
Features
Stowage and features
is halted after a maximum of ten seconds
and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-
sary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Compass
Calling up the compass
:
Rear view mirror
;
Compass display
=
Opening
The compass displays in which compass direc-
tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N
N, NENE, EE,
SE
SE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.
To receive a correct compass display reading,
the magnetic field zone must be set and the
compass calibrated.
Setting the compass
X
Set your location using the magnetic field
zone maps (Y page 272).
X
Push a round pen into opening = for
approximately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X
To select the magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in com-
pass display ; changes direction, the mag-
netic field zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass
Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
R
calibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-volt-
age transmission lines.
R
switch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
R
close all doors and the tailgate.
Calibrating
X
Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Push a round pin into opening = for
approximately six seconds, until symbol C
C is
shown in compass display ;.
X
Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ;.
Features
271
Stowage and features
Z
Magnetic field zone maps
North America
South America
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict
the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed
pedal. The operating and road safety of the
vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an
accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not
use loose floormats and do not place floor-
mats on top of one another.
X
Slide the seat back.
X
To install: place the floormat in the foot-
well.
X
Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
ers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormat off retain-
ers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
272
Features
Stowage and features
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up
when the vehicle is in motion and block your
view. There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There
is a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one
is within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off.
There is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you
touch components which are under voltage,
you could get an electric shock. There is a
risk of injury.
Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the igni-
tion is switched on.
To ensure the flow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, please observe
the following notes (Y page 123):
Opening the hood
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
!
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
Engine compartment
273
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
Reach into the gap between the hood and
the radiator trim and press hood catch
lever ; to the left.
X
Raise the hood.
X
Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
X
Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yel-
low retaining clip =.
Closing the hood
X
Raise the hood slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellow
retaining clip =.
X
Swing support strut ? down and press it
into bracket A until it engages.
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
closed. Open the hood again and close it
with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
R
park the vehicle on a level surface
R
the engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature
R
if the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carry-
ing out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
274
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
R
the engine is not running
R
the brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning
R
there is a malfunction in the power supply
or the vehicle's electrical system
When your vehicle is towed away or towed
started, you may require considerably more
effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of
an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before being
towed away or tow started, make sure the
steering moves freely.
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
H
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
!
Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with a service system.
A list of the engine oils and oil filters that
have been tested and approved in accord-
ance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products is available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or dam-
age to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the ser-
vice system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter
after the replacement interval specified
by the service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Engine compartment
275
Maintenance and care
Z
Example: engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
of engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(Y page 274).
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 336).
Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particu-
larly when the motor is warm. If you open
the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant
sprays out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open
the cap. Wear protective gloves and protec-
tive eyewear when opening. Open the cap
slowly to release pressure.
!
The coolant level must only be checked
and corrected when the engine has cooled
down (coolant temperature under 104 ‡
(40 †). Checking the coolant level when the
coolant temperature is over 104 ‡ (40 †)
can lead to damage to the engine or the
engine cooling system.
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
cle is on a level surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Check the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
104 ‡ (40 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g
(Y page 125) in the ignition lock .
X
Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure.
X
Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 337).
Windshield washer system
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
276
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
G
WARNING
If you open the hood when the drive system
has overheated or during a fire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids. There is a risk of burns.
Let the overheated components cool down
before opening the hood. In the event of a
fire in the engine compartment, keep the
hood closed and call the fire service.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
appears in the multifunction display prompting
you to add washer fluid (Y page 228).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 338).
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
You can find information on the type of service
and service intervals in the Maintenance Book-
let.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 274).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
R
Service A in .. daysService A in .. days
R
Service A dueService A due
R
Service A overdue by .. daysService A overdue by .. days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type of
service. AA stands for a minor service and BB for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time dur-
ing which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the steer-
ing wheel.
ASSYST PLUS
277
Maintenance and care
Z
Displaying service messages
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press the = or ; button to select the
Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
pressing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
ting can be corrected at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may other-
wise lead to increased wear and damage to
the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can
also obtain further information on mainte-
nance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for
example:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
R
if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
if the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
R
in particularly dusty conditions, or if air-
recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter, for example, changed more fre-
quently. Under arduous operating conditions,
the tires must be checked more often. Further
information can be obtained at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
!
When cleaning your car, do not use:
R
dry, coarse or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with
hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Oth-
erwise, you may scratch or damage the sur-
faces and films.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period
of time directly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes
after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the
brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for a long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
278
Care
Maintenance and care
Washing the vehicle and cleaning
the paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is
restored.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position i when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
vehicle may be damaged in another trans-
mission position.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and sliding sunroof are
closed completely
R
the blower is switched off
R
the windshield wiper switch is in position
u
R
the 360° camera or the rear view camera
is deactivated
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car
wash from the very start.
Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car
washes that use textile washing elements
without brushes. This will prevent fine
scratches to the paintwork or decorative films.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper blades.
This will prevent smears and reduce wiping
noises caused by residue on the windshield.
i
Vehicles with decorative film: select a
wash program without hot wax at the auto-
matic car wash.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use a soft sponge to clean.
X
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet or the edges of decorative foils.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork or the decorative foils.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior dam-
age to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative film.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in
(70 cm) between the film-covered parts of
Care
279
Maintenance and care
Z
the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the power washer
must not exceed 140 ‡ (60 †).
!
Always maintain a distance of at least
12 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
Tires
R
Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
Electrical components
R
Battery
R
Plug-type couplings
R
Light bulbs
R
Seals
R
Trim elements
R
Ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter fluid
X
Remove coolant and brake fluid with a moist
cloth and clear water.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
is the case approximately every three to five
months, depending on the climate conditions
and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following can give the paint a glossy
appearance and thus reduce the matt
effect:
R
Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents
R
Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polish-
ing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax,
for the purpose of paintwork care. These
products are only suitable for high-gloss sur-
faces. Their use on vehicles with matte
paintwork leads to considerable surface
damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spot-
ted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Only use automatic car washes which cor-
respond to the latest technological stand-
ards. Never use wash programs which finish
by treating the vehicle with hot wax.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid dam-
age to the paintwork due to incorrect treat-
ment.
280
Care
Maintenance and care
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of care products approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the decorative film
!
The following may have an effect on the
service life and color of decorative film:
R
sunlight
R
temperature, e.g. hot-air fan
R
weather conditions
R
stone impacts and dirt
R
chemical cleaning agents
R
greasy substances
!
Do not use any types of polish on matt
decorative film. Polishing surfaces covered
with film gives it a shiny finish.
!
Do not treat matt or structured decorative
film with wax. This may lead to marks that
cannot be removed.
Observe the notes in the section on the care
and treatment of matte paintwork
(Y page 280), these notes also apply to matte
decorative film.
To clean, use plenty of water and a mild clean-
ing agent without additional or abrasive prod-
ucts, e.g. use a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
X
Dry vehicles covered with film using a soft,
absorbent cloth after every wash.
Water marks could otherwise form.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
The decorative film may be irreparably dam-
aged.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
The Paint Cleaner cleaning product, which has
been approved and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has
penetrated the decorative film surface or the
decorative film has become dull.
The manufacturer can provide you with infor-
mation on special care and cleaning products.
Laminated surfaces may exhibit optical differ-
ences to surfaces which were not protected by
a decorative film when the decorative film is
removed.
i
Have work or repairs on decorative film
carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
this purpose.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior dam-
age to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park your vehicle for a long period
of time directly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes
after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the
brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for a long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the wind-
shield wipers if they start moving while
cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
There is a risk of injury.
Care
281
Maintenance and care
Z
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield
or wiper blades.
!
Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
!
Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain circumstances
prevent water from draining away. This can
lead to corrosion damage and damage to
electronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product
that is recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the wind-
shield wipers if they start moving while
cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield
or wiper blades.
!
Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
X
Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Caustic, irritant or otherwise unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the exterior lighting plas-
tic lenses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights
with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using a
wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehi-
cle and the power washer nozzle. Informa-
tion about the correct distance is available
from the equipment manufacturer.
282
Care
Maintenance and care
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is at a standstill
and the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see Digital Operator's
Manual).
X
To clean the rear view camera: use clear
water and a soft cloth to clean camera
lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could
burn yourself. There is a risk of burns.
Always be particularly careful and supervise
children closely around the exhaust pipe and
the exhaust pipe trims. Allow these compo-
nents to cool down before touching them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
!
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles with black tail-
pipes: black chrome trims must not be pol-
ished with a chrome polish as this will cause
them to lose their black shine. For optimal
care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a
lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Com-
mercially available engine oils and care oils
are suitable for use.
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine
paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth.
Remove the excess polish residue after pol-
ishing.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-
ter and after washing.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
!
For cleaning, do not use any of the follow-
ing:
R
alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
commercially-available household clean-
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
Care
283
Maintenance and care
Z
when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable
damage to the display.
X
Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X
Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and
TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X
Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents contain-
ing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts
may come loose in the event of air bag
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
!
Never attach the following to plastic surfa-
ces:
R
stickers
R
films
R
perfume oil container or similar
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
!
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear
or selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
ments
!
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
damaging the surface.
!
Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chrome polish is used.
Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when
cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
!
Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean cov-
ers made out of real leather, artificial leather
or DINAMICA. If used often, these can dam-
age the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure
that the appearance and comfort of the covers
is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
!
To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
R
Clean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
ers down with a dry cloth.
R
Make sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
R
Only use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
284
Care
Maintenance and care
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
R
differences in the texture
R
marks caused by growth and injury
R
slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
!
Observe the following when cleaning:
R
clean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
R
clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
R
clean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
!
Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X
Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Care
285
Maintenance and care
Z
Where will I find...?
Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
The reflective safety jackets are located in
front door stowage compartments :. Reflec-
tive safety jackets can also be stored in the
rear door stowage compartments.
X
To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag
containing the reflective safety jacket.
X
Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the
reflective safety jacket.
X
To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket,
roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag.
X
Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage
compartment :.
i
Remove a new reflective safety jacket
from its packaging material before sliding it
into the stowage compartment. The packag-
ing material may otherwise cause it to slip
out or make removing it difficult.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
Information on reflective safety jack-
ets
:
Maximum number of washes
;
Maximum wash temperature
=
Do not bleach
?
Do not iron
A
Do not use a laundry dryer
B
Do not dry-clean
C
This is a class 2 vest
R
The reflective safety jackets meet the
requirements defined by the legal standard
only:
-
if the correct size is used and
-
if the reflective safety jackets are cor-
rectly fastened
R
Before use, ensure that the reflective safety
jackets are clean and intact. The special
properties may otherwise be compromised.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be
stored in their original packaging in a dry
place away from sources of heat and light.
R
The maximum number of washes specified
is not the only factor influencing the life
span of the reflective safety jackets. Their
life span also depends on use, care, storage,
etc.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
-
after 15 washes, and/or
-
if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
-
if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
-
if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to
the effects of sunlight
R
Dispose of reflective safety jackets in an
environmentally responsible manner. To do
286
Where will I find...?
Roadside Assistance
so, contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
located in the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
change tool kit is in the stowage well under
the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-
change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tire changing tools are
required and approved to perform a wheel
change on your vehicle, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
R
Jack
R
Wheel chock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
:
Tire inflation compressor
;
Tire sealant filler bottle
=
Towing eye
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 256).
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 289) or remove
it.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation
compressor :.
i
Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 256).
X
Remove the tire-change tool kit.
The tire-change tool kit contains:
R
Jack
R
Lug wrench
R
Pair of gloves
R
Folding wheel chock
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
ties) (Y page 288)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
R
a TIREFIT kit (Y page 287)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 325).
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 145).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
Flat tire
287
Roadside Assistance
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's
door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 125).
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 126).
X
Make sure that the passengers are not
endangered as they do so. Make sure that
no one is near the danger area while a
wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not
directly assisting in the wheel change
should, for example, stand behind the bar-
rier.
X
Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
fic conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive your
vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure
in one or more tires. The affected tire must not
show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize an MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 320).
MOExtended tires may be used only in con-
junction with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system (Canada only) or tire pressure
monitor (USA only).
If a pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (Y page 223).
R
check the tire for damage
R
if driving on, observe the following notes
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is
fully laden it is approximately 19 miles
(30 km).
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
Vehicle speed
R
Road condition
R
Outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
is counted from the moment the tire pressure
loss warning appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
You must not exceed the maximum permissi-
ble speed for limp-home mode of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
Size
R
Type and
R
The "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with an MOExtended tire, a standard tire may
be used as a temporary measure. Make sure
that you use the proper size and type (summer
or winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
288
Flat tire
Roadside Assistance
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you drive in emergency mode, the
handling characteristics are impaired. e.g.
when cornering, when accelerating strongly
and when braking. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Do not exceed the maximum specified
speed. Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles
(curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in
particular, to a loaded vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if you
notice:
R
banging noise
R
vehicle vibration
R
smoke which smells like rubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracks in the tire side walls
After driving in emergency mode, have the
rims checked by a qualified specialist work-
shop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every
case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
For USA only: You can use TIREFIT to seal
punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at
outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown
assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire
properly:
R
there are cuts or punctures in the tire
larger than those mentioned above.
R
the wheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at very low tire pressures
or on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do
not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant
away from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire seal-
ant, observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
Residue from the tire sealant may come
out of the filler hose after use. This could
cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed
of professionally, e.g. at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
!
The electric air pump may be used again
once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Flat tire
289
Roadside Assistance
Z
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Pull connector ? with the cable and hose
A out of the tire inflation compressor hous-
ing.
X
Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert plug ? into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 260).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire infla-
tion compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least
180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure reached" (Y page 291).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has not been attained after five minutes, see
"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 291).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a
dry cleaner as soon as possible.
290
Flat tire
Roadside Assistance
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
USA only: very slowly drive the vehicle for-
wards or reverse approximately 30 ft
(10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the vehicle's driving characteristics
and is not suitable for driving at higher
speeds. There is a risk of an accident.
Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant.
USA only: The maximum permissible speed
for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph
(80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT
sticker must be affixed to the instrument clus-
ter in the driver's field of vision.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
USA only: Stow the tire sealant bottle and
the tire inflation compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot
repair the tire in this instance. Damaged
tires and a tire pressure that is too low can
significantly impair the vehicle's braking and
driving characteristics. There is a risk of
accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i
USA only: In cases such as the one men-
tioned above, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X
USA only: Correct the tire pressure if it is
still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure
table in the fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
Flat tire
291
Roadside Assistance
Z
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button : next to pressure
gauge ;.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the filler hose from the valve of the sealed
tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
the sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as
soon as possible at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installation. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This
can lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system)
or the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program).
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately. Do not drive any further.
You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
For further information about ABS and ESP
®
,
see (Y page 60) and (Y page 63).
G
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the crea-
tion of sparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehi-
cle body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
due to friction between clothing and seats
R
if you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
R
if you rub the battery with a cloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs
292
Battery (vehicle)
Roadside Assistance
or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
R
It is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a bat-
tery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi-
ately with plenty of clean water and seek
medical attention.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain pollutants.
It is illegal to dispose of
them with the household
rubbish. They must be col-
lected separately and dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsible recycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used bat-
teries.
!
Have the battery regularly checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet, or contact a qualified
specialist workshop for more information.
!
You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
R
switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
make sure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
electronic components, such as the alter-
nator, may be damaged.
R
you first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
R
in vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position j
after the battery is disconnected. The
vehicle is secured against rolling away.
You can then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp must be installed securely dur-
ing operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-
tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physi-
cian if necessary.
Battery (vehicle)
293
Roadside Assistance
Z
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should
the battery be damaged in the event of an
accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be
sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehi-
cle. In this case, have the battery disconnec-
ted at a qualified specialist workshop. You can
also charge the battery with a charger recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop for further informa-
tion.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehi-
cle parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy,
thus conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g.
if you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
R
set the clock using the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual)
R
reset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the
mirrors out once (Y page 99)
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is
a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi-
cient ventilation while charging and jump-
starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of
injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash away battery acid immedi-
ately with plenty of clean water and seek
medical attention.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery,
gases can escape from the battery. There is
a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 295).
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 295).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up
in the instrument cluster at low temperatures,
it is very likely that the discharged battery has
frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start
the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service
life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired,
294
Battery (vehicle)
Roadside Assistance
particularly at low temperatures. Have the
thawed-out battery checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Only charge the installed battery with a battery
charger which has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit spe-
cially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available as an accessory. It permits the charg-
ing of the battery in its installed position. Con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information and availability. Read the
battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
Replacing the 12 V battery
Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(Y page 292).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the 12-V battery replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
If you want to replace the battery yourself,
observe the following notes:
R
Always replace a defective battery with a
battery which meets the specific require-
ments of the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with a battery using
AGM (absorbent glass mat) technology or a
battery using EFB (enhanced flooded bat-
tery) technology. Full vehicle functionality is
guaranteed only with an AGM or EFB bat-
tery. If replacement is necessary, always
use the battery technology originally instal-
led. Switching between the battery technol-
ogies is not permitted. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
R
Use detachable parts such as breather
hoses, angled connecting pieces or terminal
covers from the battery which is to be
replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the original opening on the bat-
tery side.
R
Install existing or supplied cell caps; other-
wise gases or battery acid could escape.
R
Make sure that the detachable parts are
connected again in the same way.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
Jump-starting
295
Roadside Assistance
Z
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connect-
ing and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnect-
ing the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explo-
sion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery
may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.
Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
R
Only use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insula-
ted terminal clamps.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts
while the jumper cables are connected to the battery.
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is run-
ning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
296
Jump-starting
Roadside Assistance
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X
Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using
the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X
Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X
Close the hood.
X
Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
297
Roadside Assistance
Z
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
R
the engine is not running
R
the brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning
R
there is a malfunction in the power supply
or the vehicle's electrical system
When your vehicle is towed away or towed
started, you may require considerably more
effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of
an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before being
towed away or tow started, make sure the
steering moves freely.
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steering wheel lock has been engaged.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing
the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissi-
ble gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eye could detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehi-
cle, its weight should not be greater than
the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 333).
!
When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically
in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Make sure that the electric parking brake
is released. If the electric parking brake is
faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
!
Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
!
When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
!
The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the front axle must be
raised or the entire vehicle raised and trans-
ported.
!
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission may
otherwise shift to position j when you
open the driver's or front-passenger door,
which could damage the transmission.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be started by tow-starting. This could
otherwise damage the transmission.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed away.
If the vehicle can no longer be driven because
of an accident or breakdown, you have the fol-
lowing options:
R
Transporting the vehicle.
As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-
ported.
R
Towing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow
bar.
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.
298
Towing and tow-starting
Roadside Assistance
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
R
cannot release the electric parking brake.
R
cannot shift the transmission to position i.
The function of the electric parking brake and
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
voltage.
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a
system malfunction:
R
the electric parking brake may not be
applied in certain circumstances, or
R
it may no longer be possible to shift the
transmission to position j
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the
radio.
Deactivate the automatic locking feature
before the vehicle is towed (Y page 199). You
could otherwise be locked out when pushing
or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear
and at the front, under covers :.
X
Remove the towing eye from the stowage
space.
The towing eye is located with the vehicle
tool kit under the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 287).
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye
is beneath the tire inflation compressor
(Y page 287).
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Take cover : off the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
stop.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the stowage well
beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
cargo compartment (Y page 287).
X
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the
tire inflation compressor (Y page 287).
Towing the vehicle with the front
axle raised
Observe the important safety notes when tow-
ing your vehicle with the front axle raised
(Y page 298).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be
towed with the front axle raised.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed
away with both axles on the ground or be loa-
ded up and transported.
!
The ignition must be switched off if the
vehicle is being towed with the front axle
raised. Otherwise, ESP
®
may intervene and
damage the brake system.
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the
KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use
the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but-
ton (Y page 126).
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Towing and tow-starting
299
Roadside Assistance
Z
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the automatic locking
(Y page 199).
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 104).
X
Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position g and leave the SmartKey in the
ignition lock.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 298).
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the
KEYLESS-GO start function: you must use
the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop but-
ton (Y page 126).
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position j when you open the driv-
er's or front-passenger door or when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In
order to ensure that the automatic transmis-
sion stays in position i when towing away
the vehicle, you must observe the following
points:
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
i.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 104).
i
In order to signal a change of direction
when towing the vehicle with the hazard
warning lamps switched on, use the combi-
nation switch as usual. In this case, only the
indicator lamps for the direction of travel
flash. After resetting the combination
switch, the hazard warning lamp starts
flashing again.
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
When towing away, use a towing rope or a
towing bar with both axles on the ground. Do
not use any tow bar systems.
Transporting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
!
When the vehicle is loaded for transport,
the front and rear axles must be stationary
and on the same transportation vehicle.
Positioning over the connection point of the
transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive
train may otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
!
You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 125).
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
300
Towing and tow-starting
Roadside Assistance
X
Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock and remove it.
X
Secure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be
towed away with both axles on the ground or
be loaded up and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle
is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system:
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans-
mission will be locked in position j. To shift
the automatic transmission to position i, you
must provide power to the vehicle's on-board
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 295).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise
damage the automatic transmission.
i
You can find information on "Jump-start-
ing" under (Y page 295).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric cables could be over-
loaded. This could result in a fire. There is a
risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the speci-
fied new fuses having the correct amperage.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have
the correct fuse rating for the system con-
cerned. Only use fuses marked with an "S".
Otherwise, components or systems could be
damaged.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the
operation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings, and
other items of information to be complied with
are, listed in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in
the front-passenger footwell (Y page 302).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 145).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's
door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
Fuses
301
Roadside Assistance
Z
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
the front-passenger footwell (Y page 302).
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Open the hood.
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X
To open: open clamps ;.
X
Fold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying
correctly in cover :.
X
Insert cover : at the back into openings =
on the fuse box.
X
Fold down cover :.
X
Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and
close.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-
well
X
To open: open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the floormat.
X
Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
302
Fuses
Roadside Assistance
X
To release cover =, press retaining
clamp ;.
X
Fold out cover = in the direction of the
arrow to the catch.
X
Remove cover = forwards.
Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X
To close: insert cover = on the left-hand
side of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X
Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock
audibly.
X
Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X
Install the floormats.
Fuses
303
Roadside Assistance
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you install wheels and tires with incorrect
dimensions, the service brake or wheel sus-
pension components may be damaged.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with ones
that comply with the specifications of the
original part.
When replacing wheels, pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires, pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
G
WARNING
A flat tire will severely affect the driving
characteristics as well as the steering and
braking of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
Do not drive on with a flat tire.
R
Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
R
Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and inquire about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 329).
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on tire pressure can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 316)
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 144)
R
under "Tire pressure" (Y page 307)
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
pect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed
immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as pos-
sible to check the wheels and tires for dam-
age. Hidden tire damage could also be causing
the unusual handling characteristics. If you
find no signs of damage, have the tires and
wheels checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive
over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of dam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
304
Operation
Wheels and tires
Check wheels and tires for damage at least
once a month. Check wheels and tires after
driving off-road or on rough road test tracks.
Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pres-
sure. Pay particular attention to damage such
as:
R
cuts in the tires
R
punctures in the tires
R
tears in the tires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of all tires (Y page 305). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 307).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 330).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
R
Driving style
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tire tread
G
WARNING
If there is insufficient tire tread, the tire trac-
tion decreases. The tire tread is no longer
able to dissipate water. This increases the
risk of hydroplaning when the road surface
is wet, particularly when the vehicle's speed
is not adapted to the road conditions. There
is a risk of an accident.
When the tire pressure is too high or too
low, tires may wear differently at different
points on the tire tread. Therefore, regularly
check the tire tread depth and the condition
of the tread across the whole width of all
tires.
Minimum tire tread depth on:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, have the tires replaced
before they reach the legally prescribed min-
imum tire tread depth.
Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for
tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once a tread depth of
approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn
that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire burst-
ing. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe
the tire load rating and speed rating
required for your vehicle.
R
Only mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mount a dif-
ferent type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe here the "MOExtended tires
Operation
305
Wheels and tires
Z
(tires with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 288).
R
Only mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires
only reach their full performance after this
distance.
R
Do not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth. This significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (Y page 330).
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive your
vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in con-
junction with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system (Canada only) or tire pressure
monitor (USA only) and only on wheels specifi-
cally tested by Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 288).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 325).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehi-
cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of dam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in win-
ter and do not provide sufficient traction.
There is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use win-
ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi-
tions. Only these tires will allow driving safety
systems such as ABS and ESP
®
to function
optimally in winter. These tires have been
developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling character-
istics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
306
Winter operation
Wheels and tires
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 307).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only)
(Y page 314).
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (Canada) (Y page 311)
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abra-
sion to the vehicle body or to chassis com-
ponents. This could cause damage to the
vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an
accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never mount snow chains on the rear
wheels
R
only mount snow chains in pairs on the
front wheels.
!
On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 329).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate regu-
lations if you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30mph (50 km/h).
R
If snow chains are installed, you cannot use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 176).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pulling
away with snow chains installed . This allows
the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
ieving increased propulsive force (cutting
action).
R
Deactivate ESP
®
(all vehicles except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 64)
R
Deactivate ESP
®
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 65)
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 330).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning a long journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i
The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard and tire pressure table shown
here are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
Tire pressure
307
Wheels and tires
Z
tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard and tire pressure table on
the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes
in the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(Y page 329).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 316).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are
valid for the maximum permissible load and up
to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all
tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle;
see illustration (example).
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid
for that tire size; see illustration (example).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different
numbers of occupants and amounts of lug-
gage. The actual number of seats may differ.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 320).
308
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
R
if you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
R
if you want to drive at higher speeds
i
The tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a
sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
R
Check the tire for foreign objects.
R
Check whether the wheel is losing air or
the valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded
and malfunction, which can cause tire pres-
sure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss.
There is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board com-
puter.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has been driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking
the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the
tire pressure if it is too low for the current
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the result-
ing value will be higher than if the tires were
cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire
pressure to the value specified for cold tires.
The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 144)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addi-
tion, they also suffer from excessive and/or
irregular wear, which can severely impair the
braking properties and the driving character-
istics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all
the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure
309
Wheels and tires
Z
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leading to tire defects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can
burst because they are damaged more eas-
ily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition,
they also suffer from irregular wear, which
can severely impair the braking properties
and the driving characteristics. There is a
risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all
the tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 307).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of:
R
incorrectly set tire pressure
R
sudden loss of tire pressure, e.g. from a for-
eign object that has penetrated the tire
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 307).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the B-pillar
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 144)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure
table (Y page 307).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metal pin in the
valve, using the tip of a pen for example.
Then check the tire pressure again using the
tire pressure checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set tire
pressure using the rotational speed of the
wheels. This enables the system to detect sig-
nificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of
310
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a
loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction dis-
play.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warn-
ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart message in the mul-
tifunction display in the Serv.Serv. menu. Informa-
tion on the message display can be found in
the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning"
section (Y page 311).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 307).
The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
R
snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditions are wintry.
R
you are driving on sand or gravel.
R
you adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates
of acceleration).
R
you are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof)
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
R
changed the tire pressure
R
changed the wheels or tires
R
mounted new wheels or tires
X
Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire
pressure table is attached to the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure loss warning system
can only give reliable warnings if you have
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
will be monitored.
X
Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 307).
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Serv.
Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active PressRun Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK?
Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
YesYes.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set tire
pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
If the Tire Pressure Now OK?
Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
select CancelCancel.
X
Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor (Canada only)
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure
Tire pressure
311
Wheels and tires
Z
monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one
or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor
only functions if the corresponding sensors
are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire
is shown in the Serv.Serv. menu of the multifunc-
tion display, see illustration (example).
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally" section (Y page 313).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pres-
sure recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the
tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard or, if availa-
ble, the tire pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire pressure for those
tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
lights up, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the warning
lamp will flash for approximately a minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will be repeated every time
the vehicle is started as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as inten-
ded.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate Tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 307). Note that the correct tire pres-
sure for the current operating situation must
first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.
If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the
warning threshold for the warning message is
aligned to the taught-in reference values.
Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust-
ing the pressure of the cold tires
(Y page 314). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. As a result, a
warning message will appear if the tire pres-
sure drops significantly.
312
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 307).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering movements.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is signifi-
cantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page 223).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-
tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-
ted. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire
pressure warning lamp flashing for approx-
imately one minute and then remaining lit.
When the malfunction has been rectified, the
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a
few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
computer refer to those measured at sea level.
At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indi-
cated by a pressure gauge are higher than
those shown by the on-board computer. In this
case, do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio trans-
mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,
two-way radios) that may be being operated in
or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Serv.
Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will be
displayed after driving a few minutesdisplayed after driving a few minutes
message is shown.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
the tire pressure value to the individual wheels
is not possible, the Tire Pressure MonitorTire Pressure Monitor
ActiveActive message is shown instead of the tire
pressure display. The tire pressures are
already being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for a few
minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
played for the position where the spare wheel
is fitted is not the same as the current tire
pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
sages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
R
If the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
too low. The tire pressure must be corrected
when the opportunity arises.
R
If the Check Tire PressureCheck Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in one or more tires has dropped
significantly. The tires must be checked.
R
If the Tire Pressure Warning TireTire Pressure Warning Tire
FailureFailure message appears, the tire pressure
in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.
The tires must be checked.
Tire pressure
313
Wheels and tires
Z
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 223).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-
ted, the tire pressures may be displayed for
the wrong positions for a short time. This is
rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the
tire pressures are displayed for the correct
positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the
currently set tire pressures as the reference
values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire
pressure monitor will automatically detect the
new reference values after you have changed
the tire pressure. However, you can also set
reference values manually as described here.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recom-
mended for the corresponding driving situa-
tion on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side
B-pillar (Y page 307).
You can find more tire pressure values for
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table inside the fuel filler flap
(Y page 144).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 125).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Serv.
Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for each tire or the TireTire
pressure will be displayed afterpressure will be displayed after
driving a few minutesdriving a few minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The multifunction display shows the Use
Use
Current Pressures as New ReferenceCurrent Pressures as New Reference
ValuesValues message.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specified range. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
314
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device
complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standards of Indus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions. (1)
This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareil est conforme d'indus-
trie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est
authorisee aux deux conditions
suivantes. (1). L'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisateur de l'appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage
radioelectrique subi, meme si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the users authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standards of Indus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions. (1)
This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareil est conforme d'indus-
trie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
Country Radio type approval number
license. L'exploitation est
authorisee aux deux conditions
suivantes. (1). L'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisatuer de l'appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage
radioelectrique subi, meme si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the users authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 This device com-
plies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standards of Industry Can-
ada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions. (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired oper-
ation. Le present appareil est
conforme d'industrie Canada
applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de license. L'exploita-
tion est authorisee aux deux
conditions suivantes. (1). L'ap-
pareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) L'autisateur de
l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioelectrique subi,
meme si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement. WARNING:
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the
party responsible for compli-
ance could void the users
authority to operate the equip-
ment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only
signifies Canada technical spec-
ifications were met.
Tire pressure
315
Wheels and tires
Z
Country Radio type approval number
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair
the steering and driving characteristics and
lead to brake failure. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum permissi-
ble vehicle load. It also contains details of
the tire sizes and corresponding pressures
for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also
find information about the maximum gross
axle weight rating on the front and rear
axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the maxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for the front
or rear axle.
:
B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The maximum permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ from that in the illus-
tration. You can find the valid maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight rating for your
vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
316
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustra-
tion are examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a
load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard (Y page 316).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Loading the vehicle
317
Wheels and tires
Z
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occu-
pants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load (max-
imum gross vehicle
weight rating from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
750 lbs (340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be
found on the vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 316).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all
passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight
(if applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rat-
ing), have your loaded vehicle (including driver,
occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if appli-
cable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weigh-
bridge.
318
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their purpose
is to provide drivers with uniform reliable infor-
mation on tire performance data. Tire manu-
facturers have to grade tires using three per-
formance factors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire
tread depth (Y page 305). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The
braking distance is still much further than on
surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow.
Take appropriate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 306).
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
All about wheels and tires
319
Wheels and tires
Z
tion, or excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 323)
;
Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
cation Number (Y page 322)
=
Maximum load rating (Y page 322)
?
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 310)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 323)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 320)
D
Load index (Y page 322)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire
in addition to the tire name (sales designation)
and the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire burst-
ing. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe
the tire load rating and speed rating
required for your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominal aspect ratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rim diameter
A
Load bearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufac-
turing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
ufacturing standards.
320
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufactur-
ing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula-
ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the
size description, depending on the manufac-
turer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diame-
ter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is
a numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 316).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 322).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 322).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-
bearing index A and speed rating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find
out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
The size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR" and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
speed.
All about wheels and tires
321
Wheels and tires
Z
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on the
tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-
tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-
tion on snow. They have been especially
developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 329).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed rating on the sidewall of
the tire. Speed rating (Y page 320).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
R
Light Load: represents a light load tire
R
C, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 316).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
322
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchaser to easily identify the affected
tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 329).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three and
four represent the year of manufacture. For
example, a tire that is marked with "3208",
was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and load-
ing
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall
of the tire.
All about wheels and tires
323
Wheels and tires
Z
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driv-
er's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed
the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as speci-
fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories, occu-
pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight
rating is specified on the vehicle identification
plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent
of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-
city more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip-
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optional equipment if these
are installed in the vehicle, but does not
include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum per-
missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
324
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from com-
ing loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 287) contains information and notes
on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on
driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a
flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires
(tires with run-flat characteristics"
(Y page 288).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Rotating the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tires have different dimensions
may severely impair the driving characteris-
tics. The service brake or wheel suspension
components may also be damaged. There is
a risk of an accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wheels and tires are of the same dimen-
sions.
!
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 325).
Changing a wheel
325
Wheels and tires
Z
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direc-
tion of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-
essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only) or the tire pressure
monitor (USA only).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of
hydroplaning. These advantages can only be
gained if the tires are installed corresponding
to the direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's
door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
u. This is the same as “key removed”.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/
Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 125).
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone (Y page 84).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 145).
i
Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing
a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tools are required to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include,
for example:
R
Jack
R
Wheel chock
R
Lug wrench
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 287).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
326
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
X
Fold both plates up :.
X
Fold out lower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
X
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to
change.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip over with the vehicle
raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the
vehicle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-
cle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It must not be used for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On
a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must
be used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will
not be able to achieve its load-bearing capa-
city due to the restricted height.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Never place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
R
Never open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X
Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
Changing a wheel
327
Wheels and tires
Z
Jacking points
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the
rear wheel housings (arrows).
X
Take ratchet wrench ? out of the vehicle
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
jack = so that the letters AUF are visible.
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X
Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you
could lose a wheel while driving. There is a
risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop immediately. Have
the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 325).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
328
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque. There is a risk
of an accident.
Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
are tightened to the prescribed tightening
torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and
have the tightening torque checked immedi-
ately.
X
Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
visible.
X
Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the vehicle again.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG Line: use the cover of the outer
sill.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 307).
Canada only: as long as you are driving with
the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire
pressure loss warning system cannot function
reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system when the defective wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA
only): all mounted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (Y page 307). The value on the wheel is
valid.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
Wheel and tire combinations
329
Wheels and tires
Z
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP
®
, and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition,
when driving with a load, tire dimension var-
iations could cause the tires to come into
contact with the bodywork and axle compo-
nents. This could result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels
or accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires
if you have no information about their previ-
ous usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 307).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nance recommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on a given axle
(left and right)
R
with the same type of tire (summer tires,
MOExtended tires, winter tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 288).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat proper-
ties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be
obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel and the wheel to be replaced may dif-
fer. Mounting an emergency spare wheel
may severely impair the driving characteris-
tics. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
R
never mount more than one spare wheel
or emergency spare wheel that differs in
size.
R
only use a spare wheel or emergency
spare wheel of a different size briefly.
R
do not switch ESP
®
off.
R
have a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimen-
sions as well as the tire type must be cor-
rect.
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
330
Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
exceed the vehicle's maximum design speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (Y page 307). The value on the wheel is
valid.
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted emergency spare wheels at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the
speed limitation specified on the emergency
spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure loss warning system (Can-
ada only): as long as you are driving with the
emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire
pressure loss warning system cannot function
reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system when the defective wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA
only): after an emergency spare wheel has
been mounted, the system may still display
the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a
few minutes. The value displayed for the
mounted emergency spare wheel is not the
same as the current tire pressure of the emer-
gency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare
wheel
Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is
secured in emergency spare wheel bag : in
the cargo compartment.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Release securing straps ; on emergency
spare wheel bag :.
X
Remove emergency spare wheel bag :
with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
X
Open emergency spare wheel bag : and
remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 326).
Emergency spare wheel
331
Wheels and tires
Z
Information regarding technical data
i
The data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Installing two-way radios and mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from two-way
radios can interfere with the vehicle elec-
tronics if two-way radios are manipulated or
retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardize
the operating safety of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should have all work on electrical and
electronic components carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you incorrectly operate two-way radios in
the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation
may interfere with the vehicle electronics,
for example if:
R
the two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna
R
the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not low-reflection
This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always connect two-way radios to the low-
reflection exterior antenna when operating
in the vehicle.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of
two-way radios are not observed.
In particular, the following requirements
must be complied with:
R
only approved wavebands may be used
R
observe the maximum permissible output
in these wavebands
R
only approved antenna positions may be
used
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the
health of others. Using an exterior antenna
takes into account current scientific discus-
sions relating to the possible health hazards
that may result from electromagnetic fields.
Approved antenna positions
:
Front roof area
;
Rear roof area
=
Rear fender
i
On vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel, installing an
antenna to the front or rear roof area is not
permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the vehi-
cle closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehi-
cles - EMC guidelines for installation of after-
market radio frequency transmitting equip-
ment). Observe the legal requirements for
accessory parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply or
antenna connections intended for use with the
basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufac-
turer's Supplement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
332
Vehicle electronics
Technical data
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-
out restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada
only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
Identification plates
333
Technical data
Z
data is different for every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-
most position.
X
Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (Y page 333).
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
the windshield (Y page 334).
Engine number
:
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and
Californian emissions standards
;
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
=
Engine number (stamped into the crank-
case)
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the
labels of the respective original containers.
Always store service products sealed in their
original containers. Always keep service
products out of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must
match. Only use products recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by
the use of products which have not been rec-
ommended is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. Products
approved by Mercedes-Benz are listed in this
Operator's Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription
on the containers:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
334
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Other identifications, for example:
R
0 W-30
R
5 W-30
R
5 W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off
the auxiliary heating.
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is a risk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
away from fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-
city
Models with 4MATIC
14.8 US gal
(56.0 l)
All other models
13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
1.6 US gal
(6.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuel with the wrong
fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel
system. Even small amounts of the wrong
fuel could result in damage to the fuel sys-
tem and the engine. Notify a qualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
!
Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
!
Do not use the following:
R
Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
Gasoline with methanol
R
M100 (100% methanol)
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Service products and filling capacities
335
Technical data
Z
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
!
To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuel with unleaded gaso-
line of a lower grade, observe the following
precautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regu-
lar unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with
premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximum speed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station
staff.
i
For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
GLA 250, GLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary
measure, if the recommended fuel is not avail-
able, you may also use regular unleaded gaso-
line with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
All other models: as a temporary measure, if
the recommended fuel is not available, you
may also use regular unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
reduce engine performance and increase fuel
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gaso-
line with a lower AKI.
i
The fuels you can use in your vehicle may
differ from the information in the Operator's
Manual depending on the country. The fuels
that have been approved for your vehicle
can be found on the instruction label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
Information on refueling (Y page 143).
Additives
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must
only be mixed with additives recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instruc-
tions for use on the product label. More
information about recommended additives
can be obtained from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries
may not be sufficient. Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as a result. In such
cases, and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating from those
expressly required for the prescribed service
intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil
filter in order to set replacement intervals
longer than those prescribed. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions on the service inter-
val display for changing the engine oil. This
could otherwise cause damage to the
engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 334).
The engine oils are matched to the perform-
ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service
intervals. You should therefore only use engine
oils and oil filters that are approved for vehi-
cles with maintenance systems.
336
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
All models
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil con-
tainers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an engine oil
change, including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles
5.8 USqt (5.5 l)
All other models
5.9 USqt (5.6 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the
brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may
form in the brake system when the brakes
are applied hard. This would impair braking
efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(Y page 334).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop
or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components
before starting the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
You can find additional notes on the coolant
in the following places:
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
a qualified specialized workshop
!
Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Service products and filling capacities
337
Technical data
Z
Comply with the important safety notes for
service products when handling coolant
(Y page 334).
The coolant is a mixture of water and corro-
sion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It per-
forms the following tasks:
R
anti-corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡
(130 †).
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †)
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not
be dissipated as effectively
Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or cor-
rosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in
accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
led with a coolant mixture that ensures ade-
quate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protec-
tion.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Approx. 12.6 US qt
(11.9 l)
All other models
Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 334).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid
all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is
filled with refrigerant R‑134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the left, on the
underside of the hood.
!
Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
338
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise,
the climate control system may be dam-
aged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant
or replacing component parts, may only be
carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE
standard J639, must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control sys-
tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:
Symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicable standards
?
PAG oil part number
A
Type of refrigerant
Symbols : advise you about:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Capacity
Refrigerant
23.6 ± 0.4 oz
(670 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
All other models Capacity
Refrigerant
22.9 ± 0.4 oz
(650 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
The heights specified may vary as a result
of:
-
Tires
-
Load
-
Condition of the suspension
-
Optional equipment
R
Optional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Dimensions and weights
Model
::
Maximum
headroom
;;
Height
when
opened
Mercedes-
AMG vehicles
73.5 in
(1866 mm)
79.5 in
(2019 mm)
All other mod-
els
75.4 in
(1914 mm)
82.0 in
(2083 mm)
Vehicle data
339
Technical data
Z
Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
Vehicle length
175.3 in
(4455 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
79.6 in
(2022 mm)
Vehicle height
58.2 in
(1479 mm)
Wheelbase
106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Minimum ground
clearance
6.1 in
(155 mm)
Turning radius
38.7 ft
(11.8 m)
Maximum roof load
165.3 lb
(75 kg)
All other models
Vehicle length
174.1 in
(4424 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
79.6 in
(2022 mm)
Vehicle height
60.3 in
(1532 mm)
Minimum ground
clearance
8.0 in
(204 mm)
Wheelbase
106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Turning radius
38.7 ft
(11.84 m)
Maximum roof load
165.3 lb
(75 kg)
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Approach/departure angle
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
:: ;;
Approach
and depar-
ture angles
when the
vehicle is
loaded and
ready to
drive
When the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive,
it has a full tank, all fluids have been refilled
and the driver is in the vehicle.
For further information about approach/depar-
ture angles, see (Y page 156).
Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
ity
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility depends on the off-road conditions and
the road surface conditions.
GLA 250: the maximum gradient climbing abil-
ity is 40%.
GLA 250 4MATIC: the maximum gradient
climbing ability is 65%.
Missing values for the
Mercedes‑AMG GLA 45 4MATIC were not
available at the time of going to print.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
rain.
340
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Technical data
If the load on the front axle is reduced when
pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front
wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recogni-
zes this and brakes the wheels accordingly.
The rear wheel torque is increased, making it
easier to drive off.
For further information about the maximum
gradient climbing ability, see (Y page 156).
Vehicle data for off-road driving
341
Technical data
Z
342
343
344
